Electric 135 MW - Man Book

PLTU Jeneponto UNIT 2*135MW
PTBOSOWAENERGI
D&C
Electrical operation procedures

Second Edition
Released on July 13, 2018 Implemented since July 13, 2018
Released by Indonesia Jeneponto Phase II Operation and Maintenance Project Department

Jeneponto Phase II Unit 2*135MW Electrical Operation Procedures
Introduction
In order to meet the needs of electrical operation and management of Jeneponto Phase II
Power Station in Indonesia, standardize the operation and inspection of electrical operators on duty
and ensure the safe, stable and economic operation of Jeneponto Phase II Unit 2x135MW, the
electrical operating procedures are hereby compiled in accordance with relevant laws, regulations
and power industry codes and manufacturer's data and by referring to the operation experience of
similar units and equipment.
The Procedures are applicable to the electrical operation of unit 2X135MW of Jeneponto
Phase II Power Station in Indonesia. Some parameters, settings and logic of the Procedures need to
be improved after debugging.
Due to insufficient experience in compiling and lack of sufficient data, there may be
unavoidable errors and inappropriateness in the Procedures, and the next edition, supplement and
improvement will be made according to your opinions and corrections.
The Procedures shall be implemented from the date of promulgation.
This Procedures is put forward by PTBOSOWAENERGI and D&C.
The Procedures is drafted by Indonesia Jeneponto Phase II Operation and Maintenance Project
Department.
Drafted by: Liu Youcai, Luo Keping, and Zhai Chen
Reviewed by: Luo Xinwen and Wang Bingzheng
Approved by: Li Peng
Indonesia Jeneponto Phase II Operation and Maintenance Project Department

July 13, 2018
1
Contents
1. Overview of Main Equipment....................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Overview of 150kV Switchyard: ........................................................................................... 1
1.2 Overview of Generator #3A and #3B: ................................................................................... 1
1.3 Overview of Auxiliary Power System: .................................................................................. 1
1.4 Overview of Transformer: ..................................................................................................... 1
1.5 Overview of the UPS system: ................................................................................................ 2
1.6 Overview of Emergency System: .......................................................................................... 2
2. 150KV GIS Device ......................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 Overview of 150kV Switchyard: ........................................................................................... 3
2.2 GIS Device: ............................................................................................................................ 4
3. Operation Procedures for Generators ....................................................................................... 20
3.1 Overview of #3A and #3B Generators ................................................................................. 20
3.2 Introduction to Generator Structure ..................................................................................... 20
3.3 Starting and Paralleling ........................................................................................................ 25
3.4 On-load................................................................................................................................. 29
3.5 Parallel-off and Shutdown ................................................................................................... 30
3.6 Inspection and Maintenance in Operation ........................................................................... 31
3.7 Abnormal Operation of Generator and Troubleshooting ..................................................... 34
4. Operation Procedures for Excitation System ............................................................................ 42
4.1 Specifications for excitation system equipment................................................................... 42
4.2 Overview of Excitation System: .......................................................................................... 42
4.3 Main Functions .................................................................................................................... 44
4.4 Operation of Microcomputer Excitation Controller............................................................. 45
4.5 Normal Operation Mode of Excitation System.................................................................... 45
4.6 Inspection and Maintenance of Excitation System ............................................................. 47
4.7 Abnormal Operation and Troubleshooting of Excitation System........................................ 47
4.8 Other Exception Handling ................................................................................................... 49
5. Operation Procedures for Auxiliary Power System ................................................................. 50
5.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 50
5.2 State Division of Auxiliary Power Distribution Equipment ................................................ 51
5.3 Operation Mode of Auxiliary Power System....................................................................... 53
5.4 Running and Operation of Auxiliary Power System ........................................................... 53
5.5 Exception of Auxiliary Power System and Troubleshooting............................................... 56
6. Operation Procedures for Transformer .................................................................................... 61
6.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 61
2
6.2 Technical Specification for Equipment................................................................................ 61

6.3 Transformer Operation Conditions and Related Tests (Responsibility of Maintenance
Personnel)................................................................................................................................... 63
6.5 Operation Requirements for Transformers .......................................................................... 65
6.6 Normal Operation and Maintenance of Transformer ........................................................... 66
6.7 Paralleling Operation of Transformer .................................................................................. 67
6.8 Operation of Transformer tap changer ................................................................................. 67
6.9 Operation Provisions for Protection of Transformer Gas .................................................... 68
6.10 Operation Regulation for Transformer Cooling System.............................................. 68
6.11 Inspection of Transformer in Operation............................................................................. 69
6.12 Transformer Outage ........................................................................................................... 70
6.13 Abnormal Operation of Transformer and Troubleshooting ............................................... 70
7 Operation Procedures of Power Distribution Equipment .................................................... 77
7.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 77
7.2 Power Cable .................................................................................................................. 78
7.3 Arrester.......................................................................................................................... 79
7.4 Voltage Mutual Inductor and Current Mutual Inductor ................................................ 79
7.5 6KV Switch ................................................................................................................... 80
7.6 Common Malfunction Cause and Treatment of 6KV Switch ....................................... 83
7.7 380V Switch.................................................................................................................. 87
8 Operation Procedures of Plant Motor .................................................................................... 92
8.1 Technical Specification of Motor ................................................................................. 92
8.2 General Requirements for Motor Operation ................................................................. 93
8.3 Operation Mode of Motor ............................................................................................. 95
8.4 Monitoring of Motor Coil Insulation ............................................................................ 96
8.5 Rules for measuring insulation of motors ..................................................................... 97
8.6 Check the motor before starting .................................................................................... 97
8.7 Regulations for Motor Start and Stop ........................................................................... 98
8.8 The Motor in Operation Shall be Checked Regularly................................................... 99
8.9 The Power Cut and Power Transmission Operation of Motor.................................... 100
8.10 Motor Abnormality and Accident Treatment.............................................................. 101
9 Operation Procedures of DC System .................................................................................... 104
9.1 Operation Mode of DC System................................................................................... 104
9.2 Operation..................................................................................................................... 105
9.3 Operation Monitoring ................................................................................................. 106
9.4 Fault Analysis and Treatment of DC System.............................................................. 107
3
9.5 DC System Protection ................................................................................................. 109

9.6 Accumulator out of Operation Management .............................................................. 109
9.7 Equipment Specification of DC System ..................................................................... 109
10 Operation Procedures of UPS System................................................................................... 112
10.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................... 112
10.2 Equipment Specification ............................................................................................. 113
10.3 Operation Mode .......................................................................................................... 113
10.4 The Start-up/Shutdown of UPS................................................................................... 113
10.5 Operation Monitoring and Maintenance ..................................................................... 115
10.6 Fault Diagnosis and Treatment ................................................................................... 116
11 The Operation Procedures of Security System .................................................................... 118
11.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................... 118
11.2 Equipment Specification 11.2.1 Diesel Engine Driven Generator Specification: ...... 118
11.3 Operation Mode of Security Power ............................................................................ 120
11.4 Operation of Diesel Engine Driven Generator ............................................................ 120
11.5 Shutdown of Diesel Engine Driven Generator Unit ................................................... 121
11.6 Emergency Stop of Diesel Engine Driven Generator ................................................. 122
12 Operation Procedures for Relay Protection and Automatic Device .................................. 131
12.1 General Provisions for Relay Protection..................................................................... 131
12.2 Inspection Before Relay Protection and Automatic Equipment Operation ................ 131
12.3 Inspection during the Operation of Relay Protection and Automatic Device............. 132
12.4 Relay Protection of Generator-transformer Unit ........................................................ 132
12.5 Relay Protection of 150KV Line ................................................................................ 144
12.7 150KV Busbar Protection ........................................................................................... 153
12.9 Power Fast Switching Equipment Used in the Plant................................................... 155
12.10 Synchronizing Device ................................................................................................. 159
13 Basic Principles of Switching Operation and Accident Handling ...................................... 162
13.1 General Principles of Operation .................................................................................. 162
13.2 Basic Principles for Accident Treatment .................................................................... 166
14 Fire Safety Regulations for Electrical Equipment ............................................................... 169
14.1 General Conditions ..................................................................................................... 169
14.3 Fire Fighting Method for Electrical Equipment .......................................................... 170
Appendix 1 Letter and Model Meaning ................................................................................. 174
Appendix 2: Indonesia Electrical Professional Equipment in English .................................... 180
4
1. Overview of Main Equipment

1.1 Overview of 150kV Switchyard:
The wiring mode of 150kV switchyard in this power plant is 3/2 (one-and-a-half breaker)
configuration and GIS device. GIS is composed of switching devices such as generator circuit
breaker (GCB), disconnecting switch (DS) and earthing switch (ES), and the units such as voltage
transformer, current transformer, lightning arrester, closed busbar. All the high potential bodies are
installed in the grounded enclosed metal shell, which is filled with SF6 gas as insulation medium
with excellent insulation and arc extinguishing performance.
1.2 Overview of Generator #3A and #3B:
The generator #3A and #3B of Indonesia Jeneponto Phase II Unit 2X135MW are WX21Z-
135-2073LLT generators manufactured by Ji'nan Power Equipment Factory of Shangdong Qilu
Electrical Machinery Manufacture Co., Ltd. This type of generators is a three-phase two-pole
synchronous generator, which is directly driven by the turbine. This type of generator is air cooled,
that is, the stator coil and the rotor coil are both air cooled. Slip rings are air cooled. The air inside
the stand is driven by an axial fan installed at both ends of the rotor, for open circulation in the
generator. Excitation is the static SCR excitation system with transformer at generator terminal.
1.3 Overview of Auxiliary Power System:
The 6KV and 380/220V power supply system is adopted for plant power. The 6KV system has
6KV auxiliary unit A and unit B sections. The power source is respectively taken from the high-
voltage auxiliary transformer and #2 startup/standby transformer, and each section is equipped with
quick cut-off device, to realize the quick cutting off of auxiliary power.
380/220V auxiliary power system adopts power supply mode of power center (PC) and motor
control center (MCC). The PC power source is supplied by the low voltage auxiliary transformer,
and the MCC power source comes from each PC sections.
1.4 Overview of Transformer:
There are 24 transformers in the power plant. Among them, there are two main transformers,
one startup/standby transformer, two high-voltage transformers, one common transformer, one low-
voltage standby transformer, two excitation transformers, two unit transformers, two dust removal
transformers, two chemical water transformers, two coal Troubleshooting transformers, two
circulating water transformers, two wharf transformers, two sodium hypochlorite transformers, and
one ship unloader transformer.
The main transformers #3A and 3B are SFP-171000/150 three-phase oil-immersed forced-oil
circulation air-cooled double-winding no-load voltage-regulating boost transformer, startup/standby
transformer is SFZ-20000/157.5 three-phase oil-immersed natural oil circulation air-cooled on-load
voltage-regulating step-down transformer, auxiliary transform is SF-20000/13.8 three-phase oil-
immersed natural oil circulation air-cooled no-load voltage-regulating step-down transformer, and
other low voltage transformers are indoor dry-type transformers.
1
1.5 Overview of the UPS system:

The UPS device is provided by Qingdao LDC. UPS main cabinet mainly includes rectifier,
inverter, static bypass switch, control system and other modules; bypass cabinet mainly includes
bypass regulator, bypass switch and so on. The main power source of the unit UPS comes from the
emergency PC A section of the unit, and the power source of the bypass comes from the emergency
PC B section of the unit.
1.6 Overview of Emergency System:
Unit #3A and 3B have two sections of emergency PC busbar, which are mutually backed up by
tie switch. In order to ensure reliable emergency shutdown and boiler shutdown of the whole plant
of Jeneponto Power Plant Phase II and avoid equipment damage, a 536kW diesel generator set is
equipped to unit #3A and #3B as the emergency AC power source of the unit, to supply power to
the two sections of the emergency PC busbar of the unit.
The interlock and automatic switch switching logic of each emergency MCC section and standby
power switch is realized by DCS. The start and stop control of diesel generator set is realized by
diesel generator set control system and local PLC cabinet and DCS.
1.7 Overview of Power Station Outgoing Bus:
There are two 150KV outgoing bus of Jeneponto Phase II Power Station, named PUNAGAYA
5 and PUNAGAYA 6. On the opposite side, it is PUNAGAYA substation, about 6KM away from
the power station. The main protection of the line is current quick-break protection, and backup
protection is overcurrent protection and zero sequence protection.
2
2. 150KV GIS Device

2.1 Overview of 150kV Switchyard:
The wiring mode of 150kV switchyard in this power plant is 3/2 (one-and-a-half breaker)
configuration and GIS device. One and a half breaker configuration is a kind of multi-circuit
configuration with two circuit breakers to power one circuit.
2.1.1 Each circuit is powered by two breakers. When busbar failure occurs, only all circuit breakers
connected with this busbar are stripped off, and no circuit is powered off.
2.1.2 Under the normal condition, two groups of busbars and all breakers are connected to service
thus to form multi-circuit power supply.
2.1.3 The disconnecting switch is only used at maintenance, so as to avoid switching operation.
When the busbar is maintained, the circuit does not need to be switched.
2.1.4 Under normal circumstances:
150kV switchyard busbars A and B run;
In the first string, #3A generator-transformer unit and outgoing bus POROGAYA 6 run, and
the breakers 5A4, 5AB4 and 5B4 are put into operation;
In the second string, #2 startup/standby transformer runs and the breakers 5A5 and 5AB5 are
put into operation.
In the third string, #3B generator-transformer unit and outgoing bus POROGAYA 5 run, and
the breakers 5A6, 5AB6 and 5B6 are put into operation;
2.1.5 Under abnormal circumstances:
2.1.5.1 When it is necessary to cut off the busbar A of 150kV switchyard from power source, the
breaker 5A4 and the disconnectors 5A4-1 and 5A4-2, the breaker 5A5 and the disconnectors 5A5-1
and 5A5-2, and the breaker 5A6 and the disconnectors 5A6-1 and 5A6-2 should be cut off from
power. When it is necessary to earth the busbar, the earthing disconnecting switch 5A-E is to be
closed.
2.1.5.2 When it is necessary to cut off the busbar B of 150kV switchyard from power source, the
breaker 5B4 and the disconnectors 5B4-1 and 5B4-2, the breaker 5B5 and the disconnectors 5B5-1
and 5B5-2, and the breaker 5B6 and the disconnectors 5B6-1 and 5B6-2 should be cut off from
power. When maintenance work requires busbar earthing, busbar earthing disconnecting switch 5B-
E should be closed.
2.1.5.3 When any circuit in each string (#2 startup/standby transformer, generator-transformer unit,
outgoing bus) is out of power, the two breakers directly connected and the corresponding
disconnector should be cut off from power, and if the circuit needs to be earthed, the quick earthing
disconnecting switch should be closed. For example: to power off the #3A generator-transformer
unit, the breaker 5A4 and the disconnectors 5A4-1 and 5A4-2, and the breaker 5AB4 and
3
disconnectors 5AB4-1 and 5AB4-2 should be cut off from power. When it is required for
maintenance work, the quick earthing disconnecting switch 5AB4-1E1 should be closed;
It is similar for others.
2.1.5.4 When any breaker needs to powered off for maintenance, the breaker and the disconnector
on both sides should be powered off and the earthing disconnecting switch on both sides of the
breaker should be closed.
2.2 GIS Device:
2.2.1 GIS is composed of switching devices such as circuit breaker (CB), disconnecting switch (DS),
earthing switch (ES) and earthing disconnecting switch (HES), and the units such as voltage
transformer, current transformer, lightning arrester, closed busbar. All the high potential bodies are
installed in the grounded insulated enclosed metal shell, which is filled with SF6 gas as insulation
medium with excellent insulation and arc extinguishing performance.
2.2.2 GIS (Gas Insulated Metal-enclosed Switchgear) adopts three-position disconnecting switch
and have a compact structure; standard interval width is 2070mm, allowing transport in an entire
interval; local control cabinet (control cabinet) is equipped to locally operate the switch, while
preventing any manual, local or remote misoperation.
2.2.3 ZF28-252 SF6 breakers of Sieyuan Electric Co., Ltd. are adopted for #3A main transformer,
#3B main transformer, high-voltage side of #2 startup/standby transformer and line breaker, and the
spring operating mechanism is equipped.
2.2.4 The beaker is provided with two sets of SF6 low-pressure interlock contacts, respectively for
each trip circuit. The low-pressure interlock contacts are closed by interlock switch.
2.2.5 Name of operating element in circuit breaker local control cabinet
2.2.5.1 Local/Remote Switch: CB3 "remote/local" switch
2.2.5.2 Local/Remote Switch: DS/ES "remote/local" switch
2.2.5.3 Inter lock/Release switch: "unlock RELEASE/INTERLOCK" switch
2.2.5.4 Reset Switch: reset switch
2.2.5.5 DK1: disconnecting switch control power switch;
DK2: signal power switch;
DK3/DK4/DK5: circuit breaker three-phase stored energy motor power switch;
DK6: disconnecting switch stored energy motor power switch;
DK7: heating and lighting switch of central control cabinet.
DK11/DDK12/DK13:PT (0.1/3KV 3P 50VA) secondary side switch;
DK14/15/16:PT (0.1/3KV 0.5 50VA) secondary side switch;
DK17/DK18/DK19: PT (0.1/3KV 0.230VA) secondary side switch
4
2.2.5.6 TransferStrip1: three-phase discordance protection 1 outlet pressure plate; TransferStrip2:

three-phase discordance protection 2 outlet pressure plate
2.2.5.7 DK11~DK12 in the #6 and #8 control cabinets: secondary side switch of busbar PT
2.2.5.8 The failure alarm in the control cabinet displays:
1) SF6 gas low pressure alarm for circuit breaker gas chamber
SF6 gas low pressure alarm for circuit breaker gas chamber
2) SF6 gas low pressure lockout for other gas chamber
SF6 gas low pressure lockout for other gas chamber
3) Circuit breaker A spring discharge
Circuit breaker A spring discharge
4) Circuit breaker B spring discharge
Circuit breaker B spring discharge
5) Circuit breaker C spring discharge
Circuit breaker C spring discharge
6) SF6 gas low pressure lockout for circuit breaker gas chamber
SF6 gas low pressure lockout for circuit breaker gas chamber
7) loss of breaker power signal
Loss of breaker power
8) motor stored energy timeout for circuit breaker
Motor stored energy timeout for circuit breaker
9) loss of breaker motor signal
Loss of energy storage power
10) loss of heating and lighting power
Loss of heating and lighting power
11) loss of voltage transformer PT
Loss of secondary side switch
12) pole discordance1 signal
Pole discordance 1 signal
13) polediscordance2 signal
Pole discordance 2 signal
2.2.6 The schematic diagram of circuit breaker interval is shown below:
5
1.Central control cabinet 2. Busbar side three-position disconnecting/earthing switch 3. Circuit

breaker 4. Circuit breaker spring operating mechanism 5. Current transformer 6. Main busbar 7.
Cable terminal 8. Quick earthing switch 9. Outlet side three-position disconnecting/earthing switch
2.2.7 Circuit breaker
Application cope: circuit breaker can close, load and open the circuit current, and can close,
load and break the specified short-circuit current within a specified time.
Appearance: circuit breaker consists of body, crankcase and operating mechanism. The
crankcase with transmission connecting rod is located at the end of the circuit breaker, and the
operating mechanism box is fixed on the crankcase. The external and internal structure of the circuit
breaker is as follows:
Appearance of circuit breaker

1. Body 2. Crankcase 3. Operating mechanism
6
Internal structure of circuit breaker

1. Conductor 2. Arc structure chamber assembly
Structure of arc extinguish chamber

1. Pull rod 2. Elastic relief valve 3. Pneumatic chamber 4. Piston 5. One-way valve 6. Thermal
expansion chamber 7. Moving arc contact 8. Moving main contact 9. Fixed arc contact 10. Fixed
main contact
2.2.8 Main parameters:
1) The technical parameters of 150KV GIS are shown in the following table:
S/N Parameter name Air chamber Type Unit Value
1 Rated voltage KV 252
2 Rated power HZ 50
3 Rated current A 4000
4 Rated short-circuit breaking current KA 50
Rated short-time withstand current
5 KA 50
(effective value)
6 Rated short circuit continuous current S 3
Rated peak withstand current (effective
7 KA 125
value)
8 Rated short-time power frequency To ground KV 460
withstand voltage (1min) Breakage KV 460+145
9 Rated lightning impulse withstand To ground KV 1050
voltage (peak) Breakage KV 1050+206
Circuit
10 SF6 gas pressure (20℃) Rated pressure MPa 0.62
breaker
7
Alarm pressure MPa 0.58

Lock pressure MPa 0.55
Rated pressure MPa 0.58
Other Level 1 alarm MPa 0.53
Level 2 alarm MPa 0.50
Partial discharge (under 80% power Whole interval pC ≤5
11
frequency withstand voltage) Insulating parts pC ≤3
Rated short-circuit current closing times Number
12 2
(FES) of time
Number
Circuit breaker 10000
of time
13 Mechanical service life
Number
DES/FES 5000
of time
Handover
Circuit u1/L ≤150
acceptance value
breaker
Moisture content of SF6 gas in gas In operation u1/L ≤250
14
chamber Handover
Other gas u1/L ≤300
acceptance value
chambers
In operation u1/L ≤500
15 SF6 gas annual leakage rate ≤0.5%
2) The technical parameters of PT in 150KV GIS room
TYPE:JDQXFH-150 (model) Standardcode:IEC61869 (standard code)

Retedfrequency:50Hz (rated frequency)
Rated voltage ratio：

KV (rated voltage ratio)
Rated insulation level: Single-phase class of insulation
252/450/1050KV (rated insulation level) (Single-phase insulation level)
Thermallimitingoutput:2000VA SF6gasratedpressure(20℃):0.58Mpa
(Thermal limitation output) (SF6 gas rated pressure)
SF6gasalarmpressure(20℃):0.53Mpa SF6gasweight:8kg
(SF6 gas alarm pressure) (SF6 gas weight)
SF6 gas pressure in tranportation:0.02-0.03Mpa (SF6 SerialNo.22161105 (manufacturer's serial number)
gas pressure in transportation)
Totalweight:350kg (total weight) Dateofmanufacture:2016-8 (date of manufacture)
8
Terminal mark (terminal mark) Accuracy class (accuracy) Rated output, VA (rated output)
1a-1n 3P 50
2a-2n 0.5 50
3a-3n 0.2 30
Da-dn 3P 50
3) The technical parameters: of CT in 150KV GIS room
Current transformer
Modelno.SSTA01 Standardcode:IEC60044-1
Ratedinsulationlevel:460/1050KV Ratedfrequency:50Hz
Rated short-time withstand Rated peak withstand
current(3s):50KA current:130KA
Factory no.F15055TA31
Dateofmanufacture2016year8month
Primary outgoing terminal P1-P2
Secondary outgoing S1-S2-S3 S1-S2-S3 S1-S2-S3 S1-S2-S3 S1-S2-
terminal S3
Rated transformation 1500-3000/ 1500-3000/ 1500-3000/ 1500-3000/ 1500-3
ratio(A) 1 1 1 1 000 /1
Rated output(VA) 30 30 30 15 15
Accuracy class 5P20 5P20 5P20 0.2S 0.2
FS/ALF
Shanghai Sieyuan High Voltage Switchgear Co., Ltd.
4) The technical parameters of arrester in 150KV GIS room:
SF6GAS-INSULATEDMETALENCLOSEDSURGEARRESTER (SF6 gas insulated metal enclosed surge arrester)

TYPE: Y10WF150/416 Standardcode：IEC60099-4
Ratedvoltage:150KV (rated voltage) Ratedfrequency:50Hz (rated frequency)
Rated short-circuit current: (rated short-circuit current) KA
Uc (continuous operating voltage) 108KV In (nominal discharge current) 10KA
PressureofSF6GAS (SF6 pressure) [rated/min]0.58/0.50Mpa (20℃)
Line discharge class (line discharge class) 3 Mass (mass) 150kg
Serial number (serial number of product) FCC160379E Date (date) 2016
MEIDENZHENGZHOUELECTRICCO., LTD
Manufactured by MEIDEN (Zhengzhou) Electrical Engineering Co., Ltd.
9
5) The technical parameters of quick earthing switch in 150KV GIS room:
High-speed earthing switch

Modelno.SSFES01 Standardcode:IEC62271-102
Ratedvoltage:250KV Ratedshort-circuitmakingcurrent130KA
Rated power-frequency withstand voltage(1min):460KV Ratedlightingimpulsewithstandvoltage:1050KV
Rated short time withstand current(3s):50KA Ratedpeakwithstandcurrent:130KA
Factoryno.F15055FESO7 Dateofmanufacture2016year8month
Shanghai Sieyuan High Voltage Switchgear Co., Ltd.
2.2.9 Regulations for operation of 150kV circuit breaker:

2.2.9.1 Circuit breaker newly installed or maintained must be subject to inspection and acceptance
before applying the operation voltage.
2.2.9.2 Circuit breaker can be put into operation when its insulation resistance is measure up to the
requirement seven days after maintenance and blackout standby. Technical measures should be
taken to ensure safety when measuring insulation resistance. The standard of insulation resistance is:
1) The 150KV circuit breaker should be measured with 1000~2500V megger, and its value
should not be less than 1000MΩ.
2) The circuit breaker control circuit should be measured with the 500V megger, and its value
should not be less than 2MΩ.
3) The protective device of circuit breaker should be put into operation before powering on,
and the circuit breaker should not be put into operation without protection.
4) If the circuit breaker has been maintained and powered off for standby for seven days, the
closing/opening test or protective transmission test should be carried out before powering on. If the
circuit breaker fails in the test, it is not allowed to be put into operation. The disconnector on both
sides of the switch must be disconnected during the test.
5) The circuit breaker should not be closed/opened locally unless specially required.
6) It is not allowed to operate the circuit breaker with the misoperation-preventive locking
device removed.
7) After testing, if the interrupting capacity of the circuit breaker is lower than or close to the
short-circuit capacity of the operating point, it is forbidden to forcibly send after disconnecting the
short-circuit current by the breaker.
8) When the SF6 arc-extinguishing medium leaks and is no longer capable of arc-
extinguishing, the circuit breaker is not allowed to be closed/opened. For the operating circuit
breaker, the control power of the circuit breaker should be cut off immediately, and timely measures
should be taken to withdraw the fault circuit breaker from operation.
9) When a circuit breaker is in trouble or in maintenance, the power supply for control and
energy storage should be cut off, otherwise, the power supply should not be cut off.
10
10) The circuit breaker must not withstand voltage during slow closing/opening test o circuit
breaker.
2.2.10 Inspection of 150KV circuit breaker before operation:
2.2.10.1 Before operating the Circuit breaker maintained and resumed, it should be checked that the
work order has been terminated, whether the safety measures (such as earthing wire) set up to
ensure personal safety during maintenance are removed or not, and whether the misoperation-
preventive locking device is put into operation normally.
2.2.10.2 The circuit breaker must have a remote closing/opening test before it is put into operation.
During the test, the disconnector on both sides of the circuit breaker must be opened.
2.2.10.3 Under normal conditions, the operation of the circuit breaker should be remote. The circuit
breaker is set to "remote" position, and local operation is allowed only when the accident is handled.
2.2.10.4 Before the circuit breaker is put into operation, the SF6 gas parameters should meet the
operation requirements.
2.2.10.5 Control circuit, auxiliary circuit, control power and energy storage power should be normal,
energy storage mechanism has stored energy, and the operational conditions for circuit breaker with
should meet the requirement.
2.2.10.6 Indication of instruments that monitor voltage, current and power and protection of circuit
breaker should be normal.
2.2.11 Inspection of circuit breaker body
2.2.11.1 The nameplate parameters of the circuit breaker should be clear.
2.2.11.2 The operation number and name of circuit breaker should be clear.
2.2.11.3 The circuit breaker should have clear indication of closing and opening, which should be
identical with the position in the NCS screen.
2.2.11.4 The metal casing of the circuit breaker should have obvious earthing indication and
earthing is good in operation.
2.2.11.5 The SF6 gas pressure monitoring device should be normal.
2.2.11.6 There should be no gas leakage at the supply or suction interface of SF6 gas.
2.2.12 Inspection of 150KV circuit breaker in operation
2.2.12.1 Circuit breakers that are in operation or in standby state should be inspected regularly, and
the defects found in the inspection should be filled in the defect notice in time or handled by the
maintenance personnel.
2.2.12.2 Inspection of circuit breakers should not be less than twice per shift. Inspection of circuit
breakers should be strengthened and inspection times should be increased under new
commissioning, just commissioning after maintenance, re-commissioning after cutting off fault
current and special weather conditions.
11
2.2.13 Inspection items of 150KV circuit breaker

2.2.13.1 The circuit breaker closing/opening instructions are correct, and are consistent with the
operation conditions and display in NCS screen at the time.
2.2.13.2 Supporting porcelain insulator, fractured porcelain insulator and shunt capacitance
porcelain insulator should be intact without cracks and corona discharge.
2.2.13.3 There should be no abnormalities (gas leakage noise, vibration noise) and odor in all parts
of the circuit breaker and pipe joints should be normal.
2.2.13.4 The temperature in the control cabinet is normal, there is no condensation phenomenon,
and the heater is in normal condition.
2.2.13.5 Alarm monitor in the central control cabinet is normal, and no abnormal alarm sounds.
2.2.13.6 SF6 gas pressure should be in normal range and no leakage is found.
2.2.13.7 Each phase position display and energy storage display of circuit breaker phase operation
box are normal.
2.2.14 After switch trips in accident, the following inspections should be conducted:
2.2.14.1 The contacts of circuit breakers have no signs of heating and burning, deformation and
loosening.
2.2.14.2 Supporting porcelain insulator and porcelain bushing should be free of crack, damage and
electric discharge.
2.2.14.3 There should be no SF6 gas leakage or sharp pressure drop.
2.2.14.4 Energy storage operating mechanism should be normal.
2.2.14.5 There should be no any abnormal phenomenon in the mechanical part of and the three-
phase position indication should be consistent.
2.2.15 Abnormal Operation and Troubleshooting of Circuit Breaker
2.2.15.1 When any abnormal phenomena are found in the operation of the circuit breaker (such as
SF6 pressure drop or abnormal noise, incorrect opening/closing instructions, etc.), the report should
be made to the shift supervisor and contact should be made to the maintenance personnel in time to
eliminate them.
2.2.15.2 If the personnel on duty find that the equipment threatens the safe operation of the power
grid and the defect is difficult to eliminate without cutting off power, they should report to the shift
supervisor for application for power cut in time.
2.2.15.3 When serious leakage occurs in SF6 air chamber of the circuit breaker and closing/opening
locking signal is sent out, application for immediate power cut and Troubleshooting should be made.
2.2.15.4 After the circuit breaker is opened, the personnel on duty should immediately record the
failure time, protection action and alarm signal, stop the audible signal, and immediately check to
see whether the breaker itself is faulty.
12
2.2.15.5 The circuit breaker fault closing/opening causes operation failure, resulting in over-level
Shut-off, in the restoration of power system, the switch should be out of the system and remain the
original state, to check the reasons for refusal and remove defects before putting into operation.
2.2.15.6 In case of accidental explosion or SF6 gas leakage of circuit breaker, the personnel on duty
should be cautious when approaching equipment and stand in the "upwind" position, and the SF6
gas content should be measured to see whether it meets the requirements or not. Gas mask and
protective clothing must be worn.
2.2.15.7 When closing/opening the circuit breaker, if there is a three-phase position discordance, the
protection should be acted to trip off, when the protection is refused to act, the circuit breaker
should be immediately disconnected manually.
2.2.16 Cause and inspection of refusing to close of circuit breaker and troubleshooting
2.2.16.1 The operation method is not correct, and the circuit breaker closing condition is not
satisfied.
2.2.16.2 Operation power voltage is too low, the power control switch should be in good contact
and the circuit is broken or not.
2.2.16.3 Control switch and synchronizing switch contacts are in good contact.
2.2.16.4 "Remote"/"Local" switch should correspond to the operation position.
2.2.16.5 The auxiliary contact should have good contact and the mechanism should not be jammed
or damaged.
2.2.16.6 Whether interlock is caused by the low pressure of SF6 gas.
2.2.16.7 After the action of the protection device, check whether the intermediate relay is reset.
2.2.16.8 The anti-tripping relay contact is in good contact.
2.2.16.9 Closing relay closing coil should not be broken, jammed or in poor contact.
2.2.16.10 The measurement and control cabinet should be set correctly.
2.2.17 Cause and inspection of refusing to open of circuit breaker and troubleshooting
2.2.17.1 Operation is not correct.
2.2.17.2 Check whether there is operation power is connected and the circuit is broken.
2.2.17.3 Check whether operation power voltage is too low or whether there is DC two-point
earthing in the operation circuit.
2.2.17.4 Check whether control switch contact point is in good contact.
2.2.17.5 "Remote"/"Local" switch should correspond to the operation position.
2.2.17.6 The auxiliary contact should have good contact and the mechanism should not be jammed
or damaged.
13
2.2.17.7 Whether interlock is caused by the pressure of SF6 gas and abnormality of operating
mechanism.
2.2.17.8 If the refusing to act of circuit breaker can not be eliminated when the 150KV system is
powered off normally, report should be made to the shift supervisor who should then contact control
center to cut off power by disconnecting the superior switch.
2.2.17.9 Check whether the measurement and control cabinet is set correctly and has a interlock
alarm.
2.2.18 Cause and inspection of automatic trip of circuit breaker and troubleshooting
2.2.18.1 System fails and protection acts.
2.2.18.2 Accidentally touch of mechanism or secondary circuit causes false action.
2.2.18.3 Mechanical failure of switch occurs.
2.2.18.4 The secondary circuit is grounded and DC has two-point grounding.
2.2.19 SF6 gas leakage
2.2.19.1 NCS screen appears "SF6 low pressure", "SF6 low pressure interlock" alarm signal.
2.2.19.2 Check which circuit breaker or disconnecting switch leaks on the NCS screen and whether
other equipment leaks.
2.2.19.3 According to the inspection results, report should be made to the shift supervisor, who then
contacts the control center to adjust the operation mode to isolate the fault circuit breaker or
disconnecting switch.
2.2.19.4 All ventilators of GIS room are switched on for ventilation, the exclusion area should be
set up in a safety distance and forbidden to enter.
2.2.19.5 After ventilation for 15 minutes, personnel should wear regular protective clothing before
entering into the GIS room, use portable SF6 gas detector to check whether the SF6 gas
concentration in the room meet the standard and check the exact location of SF6 gas leakage.
2.2.19.6 Report should be made to the shift supervisor and project leader according to the exact
location of the leakage point.
2.2.19.7 Contact should be made to the manufacturer to provide Troubleshooting advice, leaking
equipment isolation and safety measures should be taken, and maintenance personnel should enter
the scene for treatment.
2.2.19.8 Leakage point should be treated, SG6 gas concentration should meet the standard and the
gas pressure meets the requirements.
2.2.19.9 Report should be made to the shift supervisor who then contacts control center and applies
for resuming 150KV system to normal operation mode.
2.2.20 One-way line operation tripping (take PUNAGAYA5 line for example)
14
2.2.20.1 NCS displays alarm, active power, reactive power, voltage and current of PUNAGAYA5
line become zero, and 150 KV busbar voltage drops to zero.
2.2.20.2 Alarm information on NCS screen and circuit breaker action should be immediately
checked.
2.2.20.3 According to alarm information, protection action signal, and circuit breaker action, the
cause of failure and location should be identified.
2.2.20.4 If the circuit breaker on the opposite side of PUNAGAYA5 line acts and the circuit breaker
on the same side does not act, it can be judged that the fault point is on the opposite side and
inspection results should be the reported to the control center, and application for disconnecting the
control power switch of each circuit breaker of 5AB6, 5B6, 5AB5, 5A5, 5A6 (when 3B unit is not
tripped), and 5A4 (when 3A unit is not tripped).
2.2.20.5 The equipment in GIS room and SF6 gas pressure should be normal.
2.2.20.6 Reset protection and alarm signals and restore the 150KV system to hot standby state.
2.2.20.7 Power on the PUNAGAYA5 according to the control center command.
2.2.20.8 After the PUNAGAYA5 line is powered on normally, execute the power-on operation of
startup/standby transformer according to the control center command.
2.2.20.9 Execute operation of other circuit breakers in 150KV system according to control center
command.
2.2.20.10 The operation of the auxiliary power should follow the contingency plan for the power
failure of the whole plant.
2.2.20.11 If the fault is caused by the factory, the location and cause of the fault should be identified
according to comprehensive analysis of protection action, alarm information, equipment actual
inspection, and parameter acquisition and inspection, and report should be made to the control
center.
2.2.20.12 The fault equipment or system should be isolated, and reports should be made to control
center, and application or line PUNAGAYA5 power transmission should be made.
2.2.20.13 Other operations are carried out according to 2.2.20.4-2.2.20.10.
2.3 150KV Disconnector
2.3.1 Overview
The three-position disconnecting-earthing switch module combines the functions of
disconnecting switch and earthing switch. Thanks to the special design of the three-position switch
structure, the effective interlock between the earthing switch and the disconnecting switch can be
realized.
15
Structure of Three-position Disconnecting/Earthing Switch

1. Basin-type insulator 2. Disconnecting contact seat 3. Shell . Moving contact 5. Earthing contact
seat
2.3.2 Working principle and state switching of positions
2.3.2.1 The operating mechanism has two driving modes: electric and manual. The rotating motion
provided by the mechanism to the disconnecting/earthing switch is realized by the movement of
gears, leadscrew nuts and grooved wheels.
2.3.2.2 This mechanism has two motors, one is used to drive the disconnecting switch and the other
is used to drive the earthing switch. In manual mode, the crank handle is actuated by driving the
leadscrew.
2.3.2.3 The grooved wheels are arranged between the leadscrew nut group, converting the linear
motion of the nuts into rotary motion. At the same time, the grooved wheels can lock the
disconnecting/earthing switch in the closing position of disconnecting switch, opening position
(initial position) of disconnecting/earthing switch, and the closing position of earthing switch.
2.3.2.4 The power supply of motor is controlled by mechanism interlock module. When the manual
is activated, the interlock module will automatically cut off the motor power.
2.3.2.5 The auxiliary switch is connected to the position indicator, and driven by nuts and a pair of
bevel gears.
2.3.2.6 All disconnecting/earthing electrical connections are independent from each other and are
connected through the heavy duty connector and the control cabinet.
2.3.2 State switching of positions
2.3.3.1 The switching of closing position of the disconnecting switch and earthing switch is shown
in the following figure. The steps are detailed below:
16
When the disconnecting/earthing switch is in the closing state of the disconnecting switch, it
can not be directly operated into the closing state of the earthing switch. The closing of earthing
switch can be realized only after the disconnecting which is opened in the place.
When the disconnecting/earthing switch is in the closing state of the disconnecting switch, it
can not be directly operated into the closing state of the earthing switch. The closing of earthing
switch can be realized only after the disconnecting which is opened in the place.
No operation allowed
switch
Closing state of disconnecting
Opening state of earthing switch
Closing state of earthing switch

switch
Closing state of disconnecting
Operation Operation
allowed allowed
No operation allowed
2.4 Operation regulations for 150KV disconnector

2.4.1 Operation range of 150KV disconnector
24.1.1 Under no voltage, close the earthing switch.
2.4.1.2 Use the equipotential principle to close the parallel branch without impedance.
2.4.1.3 Close the voltage transformer when there is no earthing failure of the system.
2.4.2 Operation regulations for 150KV disconnector
2.4.2.1 Under normal circumstances, the disconnector can only be electrically operated in remote
mode. After each closing operation, the actual position of the disconnector must be checked locally.
2.4.2.2 Before the operation of disconnector, check whether the corresponding circuit breaker is in
the opening position. When powering on, the disconnector on the power side should be closed,
before closing the disconnector on the load side, vice versa when powering off.
2.4.2.3 Under the normal circumstances, the disconnector should not be used for cutting off the
power, but only for disconnecting the voltage.
2.4.2.4 No electrical misoperation-preventive locking circuit o 150KV disconnector should not be
stopped, removed or changed. When problems occur in operation, report should be made to shift
17
supervisor to stop operation. Only in case of emergency, and it is confirmed that the operation of
the disconnector does not cause misoperation accident, can the locked loop be temporarily released
after checking the control circuit, or operation is made by using the button in the mechanism box.
After that, defect notice should be filled out and handed to maintenance for treatment.
2.4.3 The followings should be inspected when the electric operation of 150KV disconnector fails.
2.4.3.1 Whether the operation is correct and whether it meets the permissible condition.
2.4.3.2 Whether the motor power is normal.
2.4.3.3 Whether the control power is normal.
2.4.3.4 Whether selection and control of small switches in the control cabinet are corresponding.
2.4.3.5 Whether the switch auxiliary and limit contacts and the interlocked circuit contact are closed
well.
2.4.3.6 Whether there are any electrical components damaged.
2.4.4 Inspection of 150KV disconnector before operation
2.4.4.1 The mechanical locking of earthing switch and its main disconnector should be good.
2.4.4.2 Check whether the electric operation mechanism of the disconnector is good, and whether
the electrical interlock between manual operation and electric operation and between manual
operation and switch is good.
2.4.4.3 Check that the transmission rod is intact, the pin does not come off, and the rotary
mechanisms are in good contact and flexible.
2.4.4.4 Check whether the closing/opening indication of the disconnector is normal, and three
phases of closing/opening should be synchronized.
2.5 Operation requirements of 150KV disconnector
2.5.1 In normal operation, the current of the disconnector should not exceed the rated value, and the
operating voltage should not exceed the maximum operating voltage.
2.5.2 Disconnector is not allowed to close or opened or operated in a synchronous and parallel way.
Only when the circuit breaker of the equipment is in the opening position, can closing/opening
operation be allowed.
2.5.3 Before and after closing/opening the disconnector, the actual position of the disconnector must
be checked to prevent accidents caused by the malfunction of the transmission mechanism or the
wrong direction.
2.6 Inspection of 150KV in operation2.6.1 Operating mechanism box should be well sealed.
2.6.2 The parts of the operating mechanism should be normal and the position indicator is correct.
2.6.3 There are no breakages and releasing of connecting rods and pins.
2.6.4 The SF6 pressure of the disconnecting switch is normal and no gas leakage occurs.
18
2.6.5 There is no foreign body near the disconnector.
19
3. Operation Procedures for Generators

3.1 Overview of #3A and #3B Generators
3.1.1 Overview of equipment
The generator #3A and #3B of Indonesia Jeneponto Phase II Unit 2X135MW are WX21Z-
135-2073LLT generators manufactured by Ji'nan Power Equipment Factory of Shangdong Qilu
Electrical Machinery Manufacture Co., Ltd. This type of generators is a three-phase two-pole
synchronous generator, which is directly driven by the turbine. This type of generator is air cooled,
that is, the stator coil and the rotor coil are both air cooled. Slip rings are air cooled. The air inside
the stand is driven by an axial fan installed at both ends of the rotor, for open circulation in the
generator. Excitation is the static SCR excitation system with transformer at generator terminal.
3.1.2 Basic technical specifications:
Model WX21Z-073LLT-135-2
Rated power 135 MW (161.177 MVA)
Maximum continuous power 135MW
Rated voltage 13.8 kV
Rated current 6743.2 A
Rated power factor (lagged) 0.8
Rated speed 3000 r/min
Rated frequency 50 Hz
No. of phases 3
No-load excitation current If0 496 A
No-load excitation current uf 65 V
Rated exciting current IfN 1425 A
Rated excitation voltage 237 V
Short-circuit ratio Kc≥0.5
Generator efficiency (full load) 98.78%
Generator efficiency (3/4 load) 98.62%
Cooling mode Air cooling
Stator coil Air cooling
Stator core Air cooling
Rotor coil Air cooling
Stator winding YY
No. of outgoing bus 6
Insulation grade F/B
Excitation type Static SCR excitation system
3.2 Introduction to Generator Structure
20
The generator is an air-cooled, self-ventilated two-pole cylindrical-rotor motor with a closed

cooling loop containing an air-water heat exchanger (air cooler) which is installed in the foundation
under the generator.
3.2.1 Cooling system
The generator has two air cooling circuits that are symmetrical to the center of the generator.
Cooling air is fed in by fans at both ends of the rotor of the motor, a portion of the cooling air enters
the end area of the rotor coil to cool down the end of the rotor coil, and then enters the air gap. A
portion of the cooling air enters the air gap directly, where it joins the cooling air from the rotor end
coil and then cools down the rotor surface. The other portion of the cooling air cools down the end
of the stator coil, before entering the middle part of the generator base along the axial duct, and then
enters air gap after cooling the core and winding, to cool down the middle part of the rotor. It then
joins with the cooling air from the first two parts, to cool down the stator winding and core through
the radial air duct in the stator core and then returns to the air cooler. After cooling, it returns to the
fan to form a cycle. Stator winding adopts indirect cooling method, specifically, heat flow runs
through the slot wall from the winding insulator to the core, and the core is cooled down by cooling
air flowing through the radial air duct of the core. As a stator air duct, the generator seat makes the
air enter the core not only through the air gap but also through the outer circle of the core to make
the axial temperature uniformly distributed.
The air path in the rotor conductor is formed by the cold air blown into the rotor from the
space between the guard ring plate and the rotor shaft, entering the air cavity at the end of the rotor
winding and then entering the hollow conductor at the air inlet of the slot. In conductors, the cold
air is divided into two proportions. A proportion of the cold air passes through the hollow conductor
in the slot to the center of the rotor, where it passes through the radial holes on the hollow conductor
and the slot wedge and enters the air gap. The other proportion of the cold air passes through the
hollow conductor at the end of the winding to the axis of the magnetic pole, where it is discharged
from the hollow conductor and finally enters the air gap through the crescent slot at the end of the
rotor body.
Filter should be used for air supplement.
The closed self-ventilation air cooling circuit can not be completely airtight. Air leaks to the
outside of the motor in high-pressure areas (e.g. in the fan air-out area); air is inhaled from the
outside of the motor in low-pressure areas (e.g. in the fan air-in area). In order to prevent dust from
being sucked into the motor, the motor is equipped with a supplementary air filter on the two outer
covers to meet the above requirements. In order to ensure air permeability, the filter should be
checked and cleaned for dust frequently during the operation period of the motor.
3.2.2 Measuring device
The measuring device of the generator is mainly used for temperature detection to ensure safe
operation.
3.2.2.1 Stator temperature measurement
21
There are 12 Pt100 resistance thermometric elements in the stator winding, which are
distributed evenly around the circumference and are placed between the winding layers to detect the
copper temperature of the stator in operation.
There are six Pt100 resistance thermometric elements in the stator core, which are distributed
around the circumference and placed in the stator core to detect the stator core temperature in
operation.
3.2.2.2 Cold air temperature measurement
Two Pt100 resistance thermometers are installed in the generator's cold air duct for remote
measurement of the generator's inlet air temperature or connection to annunciator.
3.2.2.3 Hot air temperature measurement
Two Pt100 resistance thermometers are installed in the generator hot air duct for remote
measurement of the generator's outlet temperature; two live contact thermometers are used to
observe the generator outlet temperature or for signal connection.
3.2.2.4 In order to detect water leakage of air cooler , a float switch is installed below the ground of
the cooler chamber for signal detection.
3.2.2.5 Two PT100 resistance thermometers are installed to monitor the inlet and outlet water
temperatures of the generator air cooler, and to be used by the turbine engineers to adjust the inlet
and outlet water temperatures of the generator air cooler.
3.2.3 Allowable temperature and temperature rise
3.2.3.1 The generator can guarantee long-term continuous full-load operation under the inlet
temperature of ≤40℃. When the inlet temperature is higher than 40℃, the apparent power of the
generator decreases correspondingly.
For different inlet temperatures, the corresponding generator load current is shown in the following
table:
Items
Below 30℃ 40℃ 45℃ 50℃ 55℃
Inlet air temperature
Allowable load current (A) 6863.85 6537.0 6046.7 5393.0 4412.47
Deviation value is ±% of rated
+5% 0% -7.5% -17.5% -35%
current.
The allowable value of stator current is given in the following table when the temperature of inlet
air is higher than the rated value (40℃).
Inlet air temperature ℃ The stator current value decreases by 1% for each increase of 1℃.
40--45 1.0
45--50 2.0
50--55 3.0
The maximum temperature of inlet air is not allowed to exceed 55℃.
22
When the inlet air temperature is below the rated value, the stator current is allowed to increase
by 0.5% for each reduction of 1℃, and the rotor current is allowed to increase correspondingly until
the inlet air temperature is 10℃ lower than the rated value. If the inlet air temperature decreases
further, the current value should not increase.
3.2.3.2 The cooling mode of the generator is closed circulating air cooling, the rotor winding is air
inner-cooled, the rest is air outer-cooled.
3.2.3.3 The rated air inlet temperature of the generator is 40℃. In order to prevent the external
condensation of the generator air cooler, the minimum air inlet temperature should not be lower
than 20℃. Otherwise, the cooling water quantity of the air cooler should be reduced, so that the air
inlet temperature of the generator can be raised to more than 20℃. The inlet temperature of the
cooling water of the air cooler must not exceed +33℃. When the cooling water inlet temperature of
the generator air cooler exceeds 33℃, the inlet air temperature is above 40℃ and the temperature
rise of the stator exceeds the upper limit, the output of the generator should be reduced until the
allowable value is not exceeded.
3.2.3.4 Outlet air temperature of the generator is generally not specified (manufacturer regulations
≤90℃), but usually not more than 75℃ under rated inlet air temperature.
3.2.3.5 During the generator, the inlet and outlet air and temperature difference between inlet and
outlet water of the air cooler should be monitored. The temperature difference under rated load is:
Inlet and outlet air temperature difference of generator: 25-35℃.
Temperature difference between inlet and outlet water of air cooler: 8℃.
3.2.3.6 The generator can still run continuously with rated power of 66.7% (2/3) when a set of air
coolers is shut down. At this time, temperature monitoring at each point should not be more than
allowable value. When two sets of air coolers are shut down for reasons, they should be stopped for
processing.
Allowable temperature rise and temperature for each part of generator
23
The temperature and maximum temperature allowed for each part of the generator are specified as
follows:
Components Insulation grade Maximum temperature Maximum

rise ℃ temperature ℃
Stator core F 80 120
Stator coil F 80 120
Rotor coil F 65 105
Stator end cooling elements F 80 120
Under rated load and cooling condition of the generator, the temperature rise and temperature of
stator coil and core should be monitored not to exceed the following values:
Components Monitoring temperature Monitoring temperature ℃

rise ℃
Stator coil 60 100
Stator core 60 100
Rotor coil 50 90
When the cooling medium temperature (inlet water and air temperature) is higher than the
rated value, the monitored temperature of stator coil and core can be increased correspondingly, but
not greater than the value specified in the above table.
3.2.4 Supervision of voltage, frequency, negative sequence current and power factor
3.2.4.1 The stator voltage of the generator can change in the range of ±5% of the rated value. When
the power factor is rated, the rated output of the generator will remain unchanged and the stator
current will change ±5% but not more than 105% of the rated value. The maximum allowable
operating voltage is 110% of the rated value and should not exceed this value. To prevent system
voltage collapse, the minimum operating voltage of the generator must not be less than 10% of the
rated value.
3.2.4.2 When the stator voltage of the generator changes ±5% and the frequency changes ±2%, the
rated power can be continuously output.
3.2.4.3 When the stator voltage of the generator changes ±5%, and the frequency changes -5~-2%
and +2%~+3%, 90% of the rated power (123.3MW) can be continuously output.
3.2.4.4 In the normal operation, the frequency should be maintained at 50Hz, and when the
frequency changes in the range of ±5Hz, the generator can be run continuously according to the
rated capacity.
3.2.4.5 The power factor of the generator in normal operation generally does not exceed 0.95. When
the excitation device (AVR) is automatically adjusted and normally input, the power factor can be
0.95~1 in the short time.
3.2.4.6 When the three-phase current of the generator is unbalanced, the phase current difference is
not more than 8% of the rated value, and the current per phase is not more than the rated current,
allowing the generator to run continuously.
24
3.3 Starting and Paralleling

3.3.1 Check before starting:
3.3.1.1 Before starting the generator, all the work order of the generator electrical circuit must be
terminated, the grounding short circuit line must be removed, and the permanent safety measures
must be restored to meet the operating conditions. The inspection items are as follows:
1) Check whether the slip ring, carbon brush and lead wire are clean and in good condition,
and whether the carbon brush is well contacted and the pressure is uniform.
2) Check whether the primary connecting equipment is clean.
3) Check whether the equipment excitation circuit is in good condition.
4) Check whether all equipment in the secondary circuit, such as control equipment, protective
devices and meters should be in good condition.
5) The generator cooling air system must be well sealed, including the generator body and the
air cooler chamber in the lower part.
6) The oil circuit must be clean and unblocked.
7) The grounding carbon brush should be put on, with good contact.
8) The stator coil and the indication of the core thermometer should be normal.
9) Re-check whether the fastening bolts are fastened, including foundation bolts, two end caps,
bearings, and slide ring cover.
10) The insulation resistance of each electrical part should meet the requirements.
11) The closed bus dryer should be started up 1-2 hours before the generator starts, and the hot
air should be blown into the closed bus to start the air drying process. After 50-110 minutes, the hot
air maintenance device should be checked and stopped.
12) The closed bus micro manometric pressure device should be started and run normally, and
the device should display normal pressure.
3.3.1.2 Insulation resistance of generator stator and rotor circuit should be measured after inspection
of all electrical equipment.
1) Measurement of insulation resistance of stator circuit: when the insulation resistance
measured by 2500V megohmmeter (megger) is lower than 1MΩ per kilovolt (per kilovolt means
the rated voltage of the stator) at room temperature (about 20℃), the reason should be analyzed and
the absorption ratio test should be carried out. If the absorption ratio is less than 1.3, it may be
caused by damp, and the drying treatment should be carried out to make the resistance not less than
3MΩ per kilovoltage.
2) Measurement of insulation resistance of rotor: insulation resistance of the rotor is measured
by 500V megger or multimeter. The insulation resistance of the excitation circuit should not be less
than 0.5MΩ.
25
3) The measured insulation resistance of stator and rotor should be compared with the results
of previous measurements (under the same temperature and air humidity), and if there is a
significant reduction, the cause should be identified and eliminated.
4) If the insulation resistance is lower than the above allowable value, and the generator can
not be restored for a while, the project leader and the owner should decide whether the generator is
allowed to put into operation.
5) The insulation resistance of closed busbar should not be less than 100MΩ when measured
by 2500V megger.
3.3.2 Paralleling
3.3.2.1 Main steps for generator to recover hot standby (take #3A as an example)
1) Check whether the circuit of the #3A generator meet the operating conditions.
2) All power switches after the A cabinet of the generator transformer protection panel should
be closed.
3) All power switches after the B cabinet of the generator transformer protection panel should
be closed.
4) All power switches after the C cabinet of the generator transformer protection panel should
be closed.
5) All power switches after the fault recorder cabinet of generator-transformer unit should be
closed.
5) All power switches after the power switch panel of generator-transformer unit should be
closed.
7) According to the protection input card, check the protection value of A.B.C protection
screen and the pressure plate input of the #3A generator transformer unit are correct.
8) According to the protection input card, check whether the pressure plate of the power switch
cabinet of the #3A generator transformer unit comes into service correctly.
9) Check the outlet 1PT, 2PT and 3PT voltage transformer HV fuse of the generator should be
put into service.
10) The outlet 1PT, 2PT and 3PT voltage transformer P.T car should be pushed to the
"Service" position.
11) The secondary voltage switch of generator PT terminal box should be closed.
12) Check the WKKL-2001 microcomputer excitation regulator cabinet should be in "hot
standby".
13) The neutral point transformer disconnector of the generator should be closed.
14) Check the micro positive device of generator closed busbar is put into normal operation.
26
15) Check the thermostat switch in the generator CT terminal box should be closed.
16) Check the 5A4 circuit breaker is opened.
17) Check the operation, signal and auxiliary power switch of #1 control cabinet should be
closed.
18) Check the energy storage power switch of 5A4 circuit breaker in the #1 control cabinet
should be closed.
19) Check the remote switch of 5A4 circuit breaker in the #1 control cabinet should be set to
"remote" position.
20) Check the SF6 pressure gauge of 5A4 circuit breaker indicates normal.
21) Check the 5AB4 circuit breaker is opened.
22) Check the operation, signal and auxiliary power switch of #2 control cabinet should be
closed.
23) Check the energy storage power switch of 5AB4 circuit breaker in the #2 control cabinet
should be closed.
24) Check the remote switch of 5AB4 circuit breaker in the #2 control cabinet should be set to
"remote" position.
20) Check the SF6 pressure gauge of 5AB4 circuit breaker indicates normal.
26) Check the 5A4 synchronous switch in the GIS indoor #1 control cabinet should be in the
"DCS" position.
27) Check the 5AB4 synchronous switch in the GIS indoor #1 control cabinet should be in the
"NCS" position.
28) The two power sources of #3A main transformer cooler should be put into service.
28) The two power sources of #3A HV auxiliary transformer cooler should be put into service.
3.3.2.2 The main steps of the automatic quasi-synchronization method:
1) Shift supervisor: parallel operation of #3A generator.
2) Check the 5A4 circuit breaker is opened.
3) Close the 5A4-1 disconnecting switch;
4) Close the 5A4-2 disconnecting switch;
5) Check the 5AB4 circuit breaker is opened.
6) Close the 5AB4-1 disconnecting switch.
7) Close the 5AB4-2 disconnecting switch.
8) Close the 5A4 circuit breaker control power switch.
9) Close the 5AB4 circuit breaker control power switch.
27
10) Switch to constant speed after the turbine reaches 3000.

11) Check the generator excitation regulator output is in "0" position.
12) Close the power switch of #3A generator synchronizing panel meter.
13) Check the power switch of the synchronizing device after closing the synchronizing panel
of the #3A generator.
14) Set the quasi-synchronizing switch of #3A generator synchronizing panel in the
"automatic" position.
15) Connect the shift supervisor's command on DCS screen, and click the 5A4 circuit breaker
sequential control and paralleling button.
16) Check the sequential control condition box and the #3A generator sequential control and
paralleling is allowed by condition.
17) Click the 5A4 circuit breaker sequential control "SATART" button on the DCS screen and
start the sequential control and paralleling program.
18) Check the #3A generator de-excitation switch is closed.
19) Check the stator voltage rise of #3A generator is normal.
20) Check the excitation voltage and current of #3A generator should be normal.
21) Press down the "5A4" (5AB4) selection button on the DCS screen.
22) Inform the turbine to be paralleling (inform the turbine to request DEH).
23) Check the synchronizing action of #3A generator should be normal.
24) Check the circuit breaker 5A4 is closed.
25) Check the three-phase ammeter of #3A generator indicates normally.
26) Report the shift supervisor and inform the boiler personnel that #3A generator has been
synchronized.
27) Press down the "automatic quasi-synchronizing exit button" on the DCS operation screen.
28) Disconnect the #3A generator synchronizing device power switch.
29) Connect the active and reactive load of the #3A generator according to the shift
supervisor's command.
30) Check the 5AB4 circuit breaker is in the state of hot standby.
31) Close the 5AB4 circuit breaker.
32) Set the 5A4 synchronous switch in the GIS indoor #1 control cabinet in the "DCS" position.
27) Set the 5AB4 synchronous switch in the GIS indoor #1 control cabinet in the "DCS"
position.
3.3.2.3 The main steps of the manual quasi-synchronization method:
28
1) Check the power switch of the synchronizing device after the synchronizing panel of the
#3A generator.
2) Set the quasi-synchronizing switch of #3A generator synchronizing panel in the "automatic"
position.
3) Check the quasi-synchronizing switch of #3A generator synchronizing panel should be in
the "automatic" position.
4) After the turbine reaches 3000 rated speed, close the #3A generator excitation switch
according to the shift supervisor's command.
5) Press down the "remote excitation start button" on the CRT operation screen.
6) Observe the stator voltage rise of generator.
7) Manually raise the stator voltage of the generator to the rated voltage.
8) Check generator voltage is normal, and excitation current and voltage are normal.
9) Press down the "5A4" selection button on the CRT operation screen.
10) Inform the turbine to be paralleling (inform the turbine to request DEH).
11) Manually adjust the voltage generator to be consistent with that of 150KV system.
12) Manually adjust the frequency of generator to be consistent with that of 150KV system.
13) Check the synchrometer of synchronizing device rotates normally.
14) Click "5A4" to close on the DCS screen.
15) Check the "5A4" circuit breaker has been closed and the report is made to the shift
supervisor.
16) Check the #3A generator has initial load.
17) Quit the synchronizing device.
18) Disconnect the power switch of the synchronizing device.
19) Check the generator unit is normal.
3.4 On-load
3.4.1 The connection of active load after paralleling of the generator is determined by the capacity
of the turbine.
The time of loading under cold condition is as follows:
The load is from 0 to 135MW: the time is 115 minutes.
3.4.2 The stator coil current of the generator will be 50% of the rated current when the generator is
connected into the power grid, and the time from 50% to 100% should not be less than 1 hour, and
the speed of load rise should be uniform. In the heat condition or accident, the rising speed of stator
current and rotor current is not limited.
29
3.4.3 After the generator is parallel, the temperature change if cooling water of the generator air
cooler and the stator coil thermometric elements and the operation condition of the stator end coil
should be monitored during the load connection, and other abnormalities should be checked.
3.4.4 The generator is not allowed to operate under overload in normal condition.
3.4.5 When the generator is running normally, the power factor should not exceed 0.95.
3.5 Parallel-off and Shutdown
3.5.1 Manual parallel-off operation of generator (take #3A generator for example)
3.5.1.1 Check 6KV unit A section and B section of #3A generator have been switched to standby
power.
3.5.1.2 Reduce the #3A generator's active and reactive load to zero.
3.5.1.3 Notify to set the #3A generator's active and reactive load to zero, and the turbine can be
switched off.
3.5.1.4 Check DCS screen for #3A generator "reverse power" protection action
3.5.1.5 Check the 5A4 circuit breaker has been disconnected.
3.5.1.6 Check the three-phase current of #3A generator stator is zero.
3.5.1.7 Notify the #3A generator has been paralleled off.
18) Check the #3A generator de-excitation switch is disconnected.
3.5.1.9 Check the current and power of #3A generator excitation are "zero".
3.5.1.10 Check excitation regulator output of the #3A generator is "0".
3.5.1.11 Disconnect the 5A4-2 disconnecting switch.
3.5.1.12 Disconnect the 5A4-1 disconnecting switch.
3.5.1.13 Set the 5A4 synchronous switch in the GIS indoor #1 control cabinet in the "NCS" position.
3.5.1.14 Disable cooling fan of #3A main transformer cooler
3.5.1.15 Disable #3A HV auxiliary cooling fan
3.5.1.16 Disable SCR rectifying cabinet cooling fan of #3A generator excitation chamber #1 and 2.
33.5.1.17 Check the work power incoming switch 30BBA02 of 6KV unit A section of #3A
generator is in the disconnection position
3.5.1.18 Pull the work power incoming switch 30BBA02 of unit 6KV A section of the #3A
generator to the test position.
3.5.1.19 Check the work power incoming switch 30BBB02 of 6KV unit B section of #3A generator
in disconnection position
3.5.1.20 Pull the work power incoming switch 30BBB02 of 6KV unit B section of #3A generator is
in the test position
30
3.5.1.21 Disconnect the control power switch of 5A4 circuit breaker.

3.5.1.22 Disconnect the control power switch of 5A4-1 and 5A4-2 disconnecting switch.
3.5.2 After the generator is paralleled off, the insulation resistance of the stator and rotor circuits
should be measured according to the regulations.
3.6 Inspection and Maintenance in Operation
3.6.1 Inspection in Operation
3.6.1.1 Regular inspection items of control room:
1) The three-phase voltage and DCS screen instruction of the generator should be normal.
2) The operation of the automatic excitation regulator is normal.
3) The operation of relay protection is normal.
4) The temperature of generator and transformer is in normal range.
3.6.1.2 Local inspection items of the generator:
1) The temperature at each measuring point of the both ends and middle part of generator
stator.
2) The cooling water inlet and outlet temperature of the generator air cooler should be normal.
3) The temperature and sound of each part of the generator should be normal; and the vibration
should not exceed the allowable value.
4) The slide ring and carbon brush of generator should not be sparked, heated, too short (not
less than 1/4 of the original), vibrated or jammed; the flexible copper wire should not be broken or
heated; the slip ring lead should not be heated or damaged;
5) The contact of the generator's shaft grounding carbon brush should be good.
6) The surface of the slide ring should be smooth and free from oil stains. Slide ring air hole
should not be blocked and free from burnt odor.
7) The generator air cooler should have no condensation and leakage, and the filter should not
be dirty or clogged.
8) The wiring of the equipment in the excitation switch cabinet should be firm without heating.
9) All the equipment in the regulator cabinet, power cabinet, excitation cabinet and incoming
cabinet are running normally.
10) The micro manometric pressure device of the closed busbar is running normally.
3.6.2 Daily Maintenance of Generator
3.6.2.1 Data of generator to be recorded:
1) The indication value of the meter as shown on the DCS screen of the generator.
2) The highest temperature of generator stator coil and core.
31
3.6.2.2 Each shift should record the temperature of the temperature devices of stator coil and the
core.
3.6.2.3 The slide ring carbon brush should be regularly checked and maintained during operation.
1) The inspection of the operation of the carbon brush should be carried out every 2 hours.
2) The normal temperature of slide ring and carbon brush should not exceed 100℃. if the
temperature exceeds 100℃, the notification to the maintenance personnel should be made.
3) The replacement and cleaning of carbon brush should be recorded on log book.
3.6.2.4 The following indicators should be regularly checked in the operation of generator:
1) Rotor current of generator under rated load;
2) Stator temperature rise and rotor temperature rise of generator under rated load.
3) The temperature difference between inlet and outlet air and circulating water of air cooler
under full load and certain flow rate of generator;
3.6.3 Structure and Maintenance of Brush Device
3.6.3.1 Structure Descriptions
The exciting current is transmitted to the rotor winding of the generator through the slide ring
and brush device. The slotted slide ring and the slide ring fan for cooling are located at the non-
driving end of the generator. Cooling air is inhaled from bottom through a filter, and the brush set is
mounted in the housing. All the brushes can be monitored through the housing (with an observation
window).
3.6.3.2 Brush Device
The brush device consists of brush support, conductive plate ring, air guide plate, cover, brush
assembly, outgoing wire, shaft seal ring and RC grounding device.
3.6.3.3 Brush
1) It is not allowed to install various types of brushes on the generator at the same time. Only
after consulting the generator plant, can the type of the brush be changed.
a. The number of brushes is determined by the excitation current, and the current density in the
general brush is 10A/cm2. When the excitation current of the generator is less than 2/3 of the rated
excitation current, it is suggested to adjust the current density not less than 6A/cm2 through brushes
in each ring. But each plug-in brush lifting device should always be equipped with three brushes,
and by changing the number of brush lifting devices, the excitation current requirements can be met.
b. Replace the brush: remove and replace the brush when it reaches the limit of application.
The limit of wear is that the red top of the brush approaches to the lowest point of the brush holder.
In order to prevent the top of the brush from hanging on the handle (which may cause contact arc
and then damage), the brush should be removed when it is millimeters from the minimum wear
limit. That is, it is not allowed to remove the brush till the zero point of limit is reached.
32
c. Each ring of the slide ring should be provided with 15 brushes. The brush contact surface
should be adjusted to the arc of the slide ring before installation. When the generator is still, a piece
of abrasive cloth should be inserted between the brush and the slide ring to polish the brush along
the circumference, so as to directly adjusting the brush onto the slide ring.
d. When replacing the brush, 3 brushes can be replaced at a time on each slide ring. After
running for a certain period of time (24-48 hours), replace the other brushes if needed. Only one
person is allowed to operate on one pole at a time and must stand on an insulated rubber mat and
wear insulated rubber gloves.
2) Measurement and inspection before startup.
a. Slide ring must be kept from oil stain.
b. There must be a small gap between the brush and the holder, and free movement should be
ensured.
c. The brush has no excessive wear.
d. The number of brushes should be adjusted according to the size of the excitation current.
Keep the cooling air passage (including filter) unblocked.
e. Observe the operation of the brush in the starting process, and there should be no spark.
f. Monitor the operation of the brush every day during operation.
3.6.4 Earthing Brush
3.6.4.1 Earthing brush: Quantity: 2; minimum height: 20mm; characteristic: allowable maximum
wear; adjusting angle: vertical to earthing shaft; radial clearance S: 2~2.5mm.
3.6.4.2 Replacement of earthing brush
Usually replace the brush at shutdown. If the brush is replaced during operation, only one
brush can be removed at a time to keep the rotor voltage the same as the ground voltage. During the
process of operation, the safety rules must be followed.
3.6.4.3 Inspection in Operation:
During normal operation, each shift performs visual inspection according to the inspection
requirements, and the shaft voltage should be measured once a week.
3.6.5 Regular inspections should include the followings:
3.6.5.1 Whether any part is damaged.
3.6.5.2 Check the minimum length of the brush, and measure the wear of the brush.
3.6.5.3 The free movement of the brush should be checked by pulling the brush lead.
3.6.5.4 Abnormal accumulation of dust or oil;
3.6.5.5 Check the vibration of the brush by holding the insulating rod on the top of the brush.
3.6.5.6 Fasten all mechanical parts.
33
3.7 Abnormal Operation of Generator and Troubleshooting

3.7.1 Emergency overload of the generator occurs
3.7.1.1 In case of an accident, the generator is allowed to operate under short-term overload. The
maximum allowable overload should not exceed 115% and the time should not exceed 2 minutes.
When the overload time exceeds the allowable time, report should be made to the shift supervisor to
take effective measures and the stator and rotor current should be reduced immediately to the
allowable value.
3.7.1.2 When the stator current of the generator exceeds the allowable value, the electrical duty
personnel should first check the power factor and voltage of the generator, and observe the time
when the current exceeds the allowable value. The method of reducing the excitation current can be
adopted to reduce the stator current to the maximum allowable value, but not to make the power
factor too high and the voltage too low.
If the stator current can not be reduced to the allowable value by reducing excitation current, the
active load of the generator must be reduced.
3.7.1.3 Inspection after failure
When the generator has undergone a serious fault process, such as three-phase short circuit, two-
phase short circuit, single-phase grounding or serious non-synchronous closing, the stator winding
and rotor of the generator should be checked carefully immediately. It should include:
1) Whether the stator frame has displacement on the foundation;
2) Check the tightening state of the end winding of the stator, whether the end binding band,
bracket and ring lead get loosen.
3) Check whether the oil seal cover and bearing bush are damaged.
4) Check whether the pin of the rotor coupling has any deformation.
3.7.1.4 For asymmetrical short circuit, check the rotor surface, especially the retaining ring lapping
surface, should be free from negative sequence burn.
3.7.2 Non-synchronous paralleling of generator occurs:
3.7.2.1 Phenomenon:
1) The generator has a large impulse current.
2) The strong vibration of turbine happens.
3.7.2.2 Troubleshooting:
1) Turbine has no significant abnormal sound and vibration so it can not be shut down.
2) The impulse current is very large and the generator body has strong vibration. Parallel off
the generator immediately.
3) Contact maintenance personnel to check the generator synchronizing circuit or check the
action of the circuit breaker.
3.7.3 Generator body temperature exceeds allowable value:
34
3.7.3.1 Phenomenon:
1) The temperature measuring device sends out the alarm signal.
2) The indication value of the thermometer exceeds the requirement.
1) Notify the thermal maintenance personnel to check whether the temperature measuring
element has any open circuit and whether the lead connection is good.
2) If the inlet air temperature of generator exceeds the prescribed value, contact the turbine
duty personnel to check and adjust the inlet water pressure and flow of air cooler to reduce the air
temperature.
3) Reduce the reactive power of the generator, but the power factor should not exceed 0.95,
and the voltage should not be lower than 10% of the rated value.
4) When the above treatment is ineffective, contact dispatcher to reduce the active power.
5) Contact maintenance personnel to check the air cooler and cooling water circuit.
6) Check current and normal voltage of the generator rotor.
3.7.4 Generator under Normal Overload Operation:
3.7.4.1 Phenomenon:
The stator current exceeds the rated value, and the "overload" signal is sent out.
1) If the system voltage is normal, the excitation current and reactive power of the generator
should be reduced, but the power factor should not exceed 0.95 and the voltage should not be lower
than 10% of the rated value.
2) If the generator voltage is less than 10% of the rated value, reactive power can not be
reduced, and it should be handled according to the provisions of the emergency overload and report
should be made to the shift supervisor. Monitor the temperature change of the generator stator and
rotor coil, and when the allowable time of overload is reached, reduce the active power of the
generator;
3) Check oil temperature and coil temperature of the main transformer and HV auxiliary
transformer are normal.
3.7.5 System oscillation causes generator step-out:
3.7.5.1 Phenomenon:
1) The stator current indication of each generator sharply fluctuates and exceeds the normal
value.
2) The active and reactive power meters of each generator fluctuates greatly
3) Voltmeter indication of each generator reduces and fluctuates.
35
4) The rotor current and voltage indication of each generator fluctuates near the normal value.
5) The generator and the main transformer rumble, and the rhythm is in tune with the
instrument's fluctuation rhythm.
6) The active power, reactive power and three-phase current of system connecting line
fluctuate greatly.
1) Raise the active and reactive power of generators according to the regulations of generator
overload.
2) Check which connecting line has the greatest amplitude of oscillation of active and reactive
power, that is, the "oscillation center" circuit of the system, ask for shift supervisor's instruction,
and report to the dispatcher for consent, and immediately disconnect this line, and relieve the
oscillation;
3) Disconnect the "oscillation center" circuit, adjust the active and reactive power of the
generators after the oscillation is eliminated, maintain the system voltage frequency, and pay
attention to the electrical safety.
4) If it still fails to return to normal within two minutes after the above treatment, report to the
shift supervisor and handle it according to the command of shift supervisor.
3.7.6 The main valve is closed and the generator is turned into an electric motor.
3.7.6.1 Phenomenon:
1) DCS sends the "main valve closing" signal.
2) The active power meter of the generator indicates zero.
3) The stator voltage, excitation current and voltage indication increase.
4) The stator current reduces.
5) The frequency has a slight decrease.
According to the above phenomenon, "trip low power" protection acts, and the generator is
automatically paralleled off and demagnetized. Check the auxiliary power is switched successfully,
reset the relevant switch after confirmed by the shift supervisor, and check the generator circuit and
operate it to the hot standby state.
3.7.7 PT circuit for generator protection breaks:
3.7.7.1 Phenomenon:
1) DCS sends the signal that "generator voltage circuit breaks" .
2) The generator voltmeter indication reduces or becomes zero.
3) The indication of active and reactive power meter of the generator reduces or becomes zero.
36
4) The generator frequency meter indicates abnormally.

5) The generator stator ammeter and rotor ammeter indicate normally.
1) Report to the shift supervisor for consent, exit the generator low-voltage over-current
protection, excitation loss protection, out-of-step protection, trip low-power, and reverse power
protection pressure plate immediately;
2) It is forbidden to adjust the active and reactive power of the generator, contact the boiler and
turbine, keep the main turbine temperature, main turbine pressure and other parameters and thermal
power unchanged, and keep the generator in normal operation.
3) Check whether the secondary side switch of PT skips off.
4) Check whether the contacts in the PT voltage circuit are good.
4) Voltage indication is normal, and after the signal disappears, report to the shift supervisor
and input the protection pressure plate that is disconnected as above.
3.7.8 When the generator automatic excitation regulator is running, the PT circuit for excitation
regulator breaks.
3.7.8.1 Phenomenon:
1) DCS sends the signal that "generator voltage circuit breaks" .
2) The automatic excitation regulator of the generator automatically switches to another
microcomputer control device.
1) Determine the broken line according to the alarm and instructions of the automatic
excitation regulator.
2) Check whether the secondary side switch of PT skips off.
3) Check whether the contacts in the PT voltage circuit are good.
4) Voltage indication is normal, and after the signal disappears, check whether AVR device
sampling value is normal.
3.7.9 The system is short circuited, and the generator protection is refused to act.
3.7.9.1 Phenomenon:
1) The stator and rotor current indication of the generator reaches the maximum value.
2) The indication of generator voltage and active power meter decreases.
1) It is prohibited to manually increase excitation.
37
2) Check the circuit and the auxiliary power screen, if there is any circuit current and power
meter indication reaches the maximum value (connecting line is forward indicated to the maximum
value), immediately manually open the circuit breaker and remove the fault;
3) If the current indication of the rotor and stator reaches the maximum after the force
excitation of the generator, and the indication can not be restored to normal within 20 seconds and
the fault line is not found, the generator should be paralleled off immediately.
4) If the instantaneous short-circuit generator does not trip, but has a strong impact, check
whether there is overcurrent protection drops and whether the generator has vibration or other
conditions.
3.7.10 The insulation of excitation circuit in operation is low:
3.7.10.1 Phenomenon:
DCS screen has "rotor one-point grounding" alarm signal.
7.10.2 Troubleshooting:
1) When the rotor grounding protection acts at high setting, make a detailed inspection of all
the excitation circuits, clean the generator slide ring and brush frame, and restore insulation. When
the treatment is ineffective, strengthen monitoring and inspection, and the report to the shift
supervisor and input two-point grounding protection of the rotor.
2) When the rotor grounding protection acts at low setting, the protection starts program
tripping, and the generator trips still after the main valve of turbine is closed.
3) After the generator strips, make preparation for rotor circuit inspection.
3.7.11.1 Loss of excitation or under-excitation of the generator occurs:
1) The rotor ammeter indication of the generator decreases or equals to zero.
2) The stator voltage of the generator decreases, and the stator current increases beyond the
normal value.
3) The active power indication of generator decreases, which is lower than normal value and
fluctuates.
4) The reactive power meter of the generator indicates backward.
5) Excitation loss protection acts and alarm window pops out.
1) After the excitation loss protection acts, it should be handled according to the emergency
trip.
2) If the excitation loss protection is refused to act, the generator should be paralleled off
immediately.
38
3) If the generator is in the under-excitation state (leading-phase operation), the "low-

excitation limit" is enabled to maintain the generator in the low-excitation limit state. Report to the
shift supervisor, monitor the active power (if necessary, reduce active power), increase reactive
power, at this this, find out the cause and eliminate it. If it is temporarily unable to find out the
cause, switch to "constant current" excitation mode for operation to eliminate the generator under-
excitation operation state; if the excitation is ineffective and the generator is still in leading phase
operation, contact the shift supervisor to parallel off the generator.
3.7.12 Open circuit at current transformer secondary side occurs:
1) When the instrument circuit CT is opened, the stator ammeter indication is zero, the
generator active and reactive power meter indication reduces, and the watt-hour meter turns slowly.
2) If the CT open circuit occurs in the differential protection circuit, the generator receives the
"differential circuit breaking" acousto-optic signal.
3) If the CT open circuit occurs in the circuit of the automatic excitation regulator, the output
of the regulator automatic part is not normal.
4) There are smoke and sparks at the open circuit.
1) When the CT open circuit occurs in the differential circuit, report to the shift supervisor, and
immediately disable differential protection.
2) When the regulator CT open circuit occurs, switch to "constant current" excitation mode for
operation.
3) If the CT open circuit is caused by the screw loosening at the current terminal of the
terminal block, use the well-insulated screwdriver and stand on the insulated platform to tighten the
screw of the current terminal.
4) If the CT open circuit is close to the primary equipment, report the shift supervisor and shut
down the equipment for troubleshooting.
3.7.13 The generator catches fire inside:
There is abnormal sound inside the generator, and there is smoke and burnt odor at the end
covers on both sides.
3.7.13.2 Troubleshooting
1) Report to the shift supervisor to shut down and parallel off, and cut off excitation.
2) Fight fire according to fire control regulations.
3.7.14 The generator should be shut down immediately if any of the following conditions occurs.
39
3.7.14.1 The generator smokes and catches fire.

3.7.14.2 The personal safety is endangered.
3.7.14.3 The generator excitation system seriously fails.
3.7.14.4 The generator vibrates vigorously.
3.7.15 Stripping occurs when the generator backup protection acts or bus differential protection acts:
3.7.15.1 If the generator still has obvious fault after tripping, press down the emergency tripping
button immediately to make the excitation switch tripping. If the excitation switch refuses to trip,
manually pull off the switch immediately and check the automatic connection of auxiliary power
should be successful.
3.7.15.2 If the boiler is in good condition and the instrument indication of the generator is not
abnormal, the electrical duty personnel should adjust the voltage and frequency of the generator to
the normal value so as to maintain the operation of the auxiliary power. And timely contact with the
duty personnel of turbine and boiler.
3.7.15.3 Quickly check the protection action and equipment, and 150KV bus voltage. After finding
out the cause or eliminating the fault, the generator can be supplied with the auxiliary power and
connected to the power grid for operation
3.7.16 The protection action makes all the switches of the generator tripping.
3.7.16.1 Check 6KV auxiliary standby power switch should be automatically put into operation
successfully, and if the excitation switch refuses to trip, immediately manually pull it off;
3.7.16.2 Immediately check the protective action, make a detailed external inspection of the
generator-transformer unit and its related equipment, check whether there are external faults (such
as smoke, noise, etc.), take safety measures, and measure the insulation resistance of the generator
so as to determine whether the generator and its related equipment are damaged or not, and check
whether there is any fault in the system.
3.7.16.3 If no fault is found in the generator-transformer unit and its circuit, the generator can be
stepped up from zero (at this time, the neutral point disconnector of the main transformer should be
closed and grounded). When any abnormal condition is found during stepping up, immediately step
down and shut down, and further check the equipment in detail; if no abnormal condition is found,
connect the generator into the power grid for operation.
3.7.17 The generator stator grounding:
When the generator stator circuit is grounded, the generator stator ground signal is sent out. At
this point, the following methods should be used to identify and find faults:
3.7.17.1 Check the indication values of the voltage and line voltage of the each phase of generator
stator voltmeter immediately. When the generator stator circuit is grounded, the voltage of each line
is indicated as normal value, and the grounding phase voltage is lower than the normal phase
voltage value (the grounding phase voltage is zero in the case of metal grounding). The voltage of
40
other two phases is higher than the normal phase voltages (the phase voltages of the non-grounded
two phases rise to the line voltage in the case of metal grounding).
3.7.17.2 Check which phase is grounded and reset the grounding signal (the signal must be recorded
in detail before resetting signal) to identify the nature of the fault.
3.7.17.3 Quickly carry out the external inspection of the voltage circuit of the generator outgoing
bus to find out whether there is a grounding.
3.7.17.4 If it is verified through checking and finding that there is no external grounding fault,
switch the auxiliary power to the standby power immediately to reduce the reactive load of the
generator to zero, parallel off the generator and disconnect the demagnetization switch.
3.7.17.5 If the generator is found externally grounded, try to eliminate the fault. If the fault can not
be eliminated, the load should be reduced to zero in 30 minutes.
3.7.17.6 While carrying out the above treatment, timely report to the dispatcher and the relevant
leaders of the project department.
3.7.18 When it is necessary to shut down in case of any accident caused by the generator or boiler,
an order of shift supervisor should be obtained. If time permits in the event of an emergency, the
normal parallel-off step can be followed, that is, the auxiliary power is switched to the standby
power, and the generator is paralleled off with the system after the reactive load is reduced to zero.
If the accident is very urgent that does not allow to follow the above steps, press the
"emergency tripping" button to parallel the generator and the grid. At this case, the automatic switch
of auxiliary power switch should be put into use normally.
41
4. Operation Procedures for Excitation System

4.1 Specifications for excitation system equipment
4.1.1 Excitation device model: WKKL-2001 microcomputer excitation regulator
4.1.2 Excitation mode: self-shunt excitation.
4.1.3 Main technical indicators
4.1.3.1 Excitation response time: the rise time is not more than 0.08S, and the drop time is not more
than 0.15S.
4.1.3.2 Static voltage regulation accuracy: superior to 0.5%.
4.1.3.3 When the generator is no load, the frequency changes by 1%, and the generator voltage
should not change more than ±0.1%Ue.
4.1.3.4 Voltage regulation range of automatic part: 0% - 130%Ue for conventional excitation
system; 5% - 130%Ue for self-shunt excitation system; regulation rate: (0.3%-1%) Ue/S.
4.1.4 10% step response test: overshoot less than 20%, times of oscillation less than 3 times, and
adjustment time less than 5 seconds.
4.1.5 Additional difference adjustment: within ±15%, differential 0.1%.
4.1.6 Main regulating ring operation cycle: 10ms
4.1.7 SCR control angle a resolution: 0.05°/bit code
4.1.8 A/D switch: 8-path, resolution 2-14
4.1.9 Phase shift range: 10~150°, adjustable.
4.1.10 Power consumption: < 100W
4.1.11 Specifications for excitation transformer equipment are given in transformer part.
4.2 Overview of Excitation System:
The excitation control system of #3A and 3B units adopts WKKL-2001 microcomputer
excitation regulator. It has DSP chip as the core and a simpler hardware structure and extremely
rich software functions, and adopts fully digital microcomputer control technology. The excitation
control system consists of excitation transformer, de-excitation device, SCR rectifier,
microcomputer excitation regulator and so on. It meets the control requirements of generator static
rectification excitation system.
Features of the device: The PSS of the device can obviously improve the static limit of the
generator and the dynamic stability under the condition of large disturbance, reduce the time
constant of the exciter to improve the transient stability of the power system. With the perfect self-
test function, the hardware, software and power of the device can be tested in a comprehensive way,
thus to improve the reliability of the device. Through the liquid crystal display, the various
42
operating parameters and running state of the generator can be viewed. At the same time, the
display also provides various operation tips and human-machine interface.
The analog and state quantities are recorded for the device at a cycle, a total of 16 groups, namely
10 analog quantities and 6 groups of switching quantities, a total of 96 state quantities. When a fault
occurs, the time of the fault point and the data in first 8 seconds and last 12 seconds of the fault are
recorded, and the function of continuous recording of multiple faults is provided. Record the
occurrence status of at least 4000 recent events in accordance with the first-in-first-out principle.
Record data of at least 10 recent fault can be saved in case of power failure, so as to analyze the
cause of the fault. In automatic mode, the two channels can track each other automatically, and the
switch is undisturbed.
The device is designed and configured according to N-1 principle, which ensures that the
generator can meet the requirements of normal excitation and forced excitation when a rectifier
cabinet is withdrawn. The device also provides on-line modification and output switch quantity
debugging.
The WKKL-2001 microcomputer excitation regulator is suitable for generator set and self-
shunt excitation brushless excitation system. See Fig. 2-1
Generator
Measurement PT
Instrument PT
Demagnetization
WKKL
Excitation
controller
Fig. 2-1 Self-shunt Excitation System
Fig. 2-1 Self-shunt Excitation System

4.2.2 Main components of WKKL-2001 microcomputer excitation regulator
4.2.2.1 Excitation transformer
The high voltage side of the transformer is connected to the generator outlet busbar, and the low
voltage side is rectified by SCR and sent to the excitation busbar as the generator excitation power
source. The excitation low voltage side wire is connected to the upper side of the disconnector on
the AC side of the power cabinet.
4.2.2.2 Hardware part:
WKKL-2001 microcomputer excitation controller is a 265mm (Height)*260mm
(width)*272mm (depth) chassis. The composition of hardware circuit is as follows:
43
Host Board 1 pc.

SCR pulse isolation and amplifier board 1 pc.
Analog signal processing board 1 pc.
Power board 1 pc.
relay panel 1 pc.
Each board is connected with the back board through the inlet plug socket, and the chassis is
connected with the external through the inlet terminal.
A WKKL-2001 microcomputer excitation controller is equipped with input-output switch and
SCR power unit to form a complete excitation regulator.
4.3 Main Functions
4.3.1 Proportional, integral and differential (PID) regulation
4.3.2 Constant power factor regulation
4.3.3 Constant reactive power regulation
4.3.4 Constant excitation current regulation
4.3.5 Positive and negative differential adjustment and setting of adjustment rate
4.3.6 Overcurrent limit and protection, and maximum current protection
4.3.7 Low excitation limit and protection
4.3.8 Forced excitation limit and protection
4.3.9 V/Hz limit and protection, and no-load overvoltage protection
4.3.10 PT fuse burn-out protection
4.3.11 Pulse readout and missing pulse detection
4.3.12 Self-checking function and fault tolerant processing
4.3.12.1 The initialization process of the device is to detect the program memory, data memory and
A/D conversion, etc. to detect, and if abnormal, the "device error" signal alarm will be sent out.
4.3.12.2 The device also adopts the least hardware, with rich software detection methods, to timely
detect various abnormal operating conditions, and treat the corresponding alarm or switch to ensure
the stable operation of the generator set.
4.3.12.3 The comprehensive self-detection of hardware, software, power supply and others improve
the reliability of the device. For users, more intuitive characteristics are the operation button anti-
adhesion, the phase sequence error prevention for the incoming bus and synchronizing circuit in the
initial operation period, and pulse readback.
4.3.13 DCS interface
4.3.14 RS232 or RS485 communication interface is provided, which allows information exchange
with superior computers.
44
4.3.15 The system's voltage function can be tracked before starting and parallel-in.
4.4 Operation of Microcomputer Excitation Controller
4.4.1 Device panel layout:
4.4.1.1 The panel layout of the controller is shown in Fig. 2-2, which consists of six parts from top
to bottom.
1) The first part is the LCD panel at the top.
2) The second part is the signal display area, which is mainly composed of
a. power indicator signal: "power normal" is to indicate the status of DC powers.
b. controller status instruction: "automatic operation", "manual operation", "regulator
exit" and "all normal" are to indicate the actual state of the controller.
c. fault signal indication: "switch to manual in fault", "device error", "over-current limit",
"low excitation limit", "volt limit", "PT fuse burn-out", "pulse error" and other signals are
indicate the fault of the controller.
3) The third part is the controller's "signal reset" button.
4) The fourth part is the LCD keyboard operating buttons: including the "八" button, "V"
button, "＜" button, ">" button, "+" button, "-" button, "Cancel" button, and "OK" button.
5) The fifth part is serial port: it is used to communicate with the background computer or
notebook computer, upload the controller's parameters, test waveforms, fault records, event records
and other data to the background computer or notebook computer. It is of plug-and-play type, and
can be plugged and unplugged with power on; test port: unused.
6) Part sixth is controller operating switches and indicator lights: "Central control"/"Local"
switch, "Run"/"Exit" switch, "Set" switch, "Increase excitation" switch, "Decrease excitation " with
reset switch and corresponding indicator lights.
4.5 Normal Operation Mode of Excitation System
4.5.1 The excitation regulator should operate normally in the A channel, and the B channel tracking
mode is the main operation mode. When the A channel fails and exits, the excitation regulator
automatically switches to the B channel.
4.5.2 The excitation regulator has automatic operation mode and manual operation mode; normally
it should be operated in automatic mode; when the protection function is concerned, it can be
operated in manual mode automatically.
4.5.3 Two power cabinets should normally be put into operation. When the power cabinets are
running, the fan must be run at the same time. When the fan of power cabinets in operation fails, the
trouble should be eliminated as soon as possible.
4.5.4 The control of excitation regulator mainly includes "Remote"/"Local" switch control, and
"Remote" control should be the main control in normal condition. At this point, the controller is
45
controlled by the central control input switch quantity, with D11 (Run/Exit), D13 (Increase
excitation), D14 (Decrease excitation), and D17 (Start excitation). The panel operating switch (or
button) plays a role in local control.
4.5.5 In manual operation mode, the closed loop regulation is made according to the generator rotor
current or regulator output current.
4.5.6 Before the excitation regulator is powered on, each switch quantity should be in the state of
exit, that is, the switch on the panel is in the position of "Local" and "Exit" or the switch on the
panel is in the position of "Central control" and the output switch quantity D11 (Run) is in the state
of disconnecting.
46
4.5.7 Regulator has three statuses: "Automatic operation", "Manual operation" and "Exit". The
normal operation state of the regulator follows the rules below:
Panel (or back of panel) Input switching variables

9.3.1
Controller Central D13 D14
Increase Set point D11 D17 Start
States control/local Run/exit Automatic/manual excitation lower
Set
Run
Increase Decrease
excitation
excitation excitation
Exit Local Exit X Ineffective Ineffective Ineffective X X X X
Automatic Local Operation Automatic Effective Effective Effective X X X X
Manual Local Operation Manual Effective Effective Ineffective X X X X
Central
Exit X X X X X Break Ineffective Ineffective Ineffective
control
Central
Automatic X Automatic X X X Close Effective Effective Effective
control
Central
Manual X Manual X X X Close Effective Effective Ineffective
control
4.6 Inspection and Maintenance of Excitation System

4.6.1 Check whether the fan surface and blades are seriously dirty, whether ventilation is normal,
and whether there is abnormal noise. And if noise significantly increases, timely maintenance
should be should be to eliminate it.
4.6.2 Standby fan: If the power cabinets has double fans, the standby fan should be checked during
maintenance. In addition to routine inspection, switch to the standby fan, to see if it runs normally,
and then switch back to the main fan.
4.6.3 Check the air filter on the door cabinet. If the air filter is dirty and difficult to clean, it must be
replaced.
4.6.4 Check the temperature of the radiator. Check the temperature of the display under certain
output voltage, current and environmental conditions. If the temperature is significantly different
from the previous record under similar conditions, carefully check the dirt and dust of the fan,
radiator and filter.
4.6.5 Check cable lead and screw bolts of each part without loosening and heating.
4.6.6 Disconnectors on the AC and DC sides are checked for normal items.
4.7 Abnormal Operation and Troubleshooting of Excitation System
In most cases, the normal functions of the excitation system are continuously monitored by the
excitation fault monitoring system. Once these functions fail, the monitoring system will send out
alarm signals and give out fault information. When abnormal conditions occur in the operation of
the excitation device, the relevant circuit should be checked in time, the corresponding measures
should be taken, and the relevant inspection, meter indication and signal indication should be
recorded.
4.7.1 Failure of automatic de-excitation device
47
When the generator breaks off, if the automatic de-excitation device is found failed, the trouble
should be removed . Before the failure of the automatic de-excitation device is eliminated, the
generator must not be put into operation.
4.7.2 Excitation circuit grounding
4.7.2.1 In normal operation of generator, the following methods should be adopted when the
excitation circuit is grounded at one point (grounding signal is sent out) or the insulation is suddenly
reduced:
1) Measure the positive and negative voltage to earth of the generator rotor, if (U+)+(U-)=U, it
indicates that the excitation circuit has been grounded at one point.
If the difference between U+ and U- is large, and (u+)+(u-)≠U, the insulation resistance of the
excitation circuit can be calculated according to the formula.
Ru - Internal resistance of voltmeter
At this case, the monitoring of the unit should be strengthened, and the slide ring and the
equipment in power cabinet, excitation conversion cabinet and excitation switchboard
2) If the insulation resistance can not be restored, the multimeter should be used to measure the
grounding voltage at the DC side busbar of the power cabinet, the excitation bus bar of the
excitation switchboard and the generator slide ring respectively.
3) If the positive electrode is grounded, the multimeter "+" is connected to the positive
electrode, and the multimeter "-" is connected to the ground, and the voltage values of U1, U2 and
U3 are then measured respectively. If the voltages are indicated positive, and U1>U2>U3, it
indicates the rotor inside is grounded. If U1 and U2 are positive, and U3 is negative and U1 > U2, it
indicates that the grounding is made between the excitation busbar in the excitation switchboard and
the sliding ring. If U1 is positive, and U2 and U3 are negative, it indicates that the grounding is
made between the excitation busbar in the excitation switchboard and the DC side busbar in the
power cabinet.
4) If the negative electrode is grounded, the multimeter "'-" should be connected to the
negative electrode, and the multimeter "+" should be connected to the ground, and the measuring
method is the same as above.
Wherein: U1 - Voltage to ground at the DC side in the power cabinet
U2 - Voltage to ground at excitation busbar in excitation switchboard
U3 - Voltage to ground at generator slide ring
After the grounding range is decided, the location of grounding should be found out and
eliminated as far as possible.
48
5) If the grounding fault can not be eliminated, and the fault point is in the rotor and it is
metallic one-point grounded stably, the prompt report should be made to the project manager and
the rotor two-point grounding protection should be put into operation (depending on the site
situation). And the device should be shut down as soon as possible for maintenance.
4.7.3 Precautions for enabling two-point grounding protection of the rotor:
4.7.3.1 Before putting the two-point grounding protection into operation, check the contact of the
grounded carbon brush of large shaft should be good, and prohibit touching the grounded carbon
brush after putting the protection into operation.
4.7.3.2 If the insulation resistance of the rotor is restored and the grounding disappears, two-point
grounding protection should be withdrawn immediately.
When the rotor circuit is grounded at two points, the generator should be paralleled off and de-
excited immediately.
When there is unallowed vibration or significant increase (up to 10%) of the rotor current due
to inter-turn short circuit of rotor coil, the load must be reduced immediately, so that the vibration
or rotor current can be reduced to the allowable range, and apply for shutdown for inspection and
troubleshooting as soon as possible.
4.8 Other Exception Handling
When a strong spark or heat occurs in the carbon brush of the generator slide ring, the duty
personnel should report to the shift supervisor to try to reduce the load and excitation of the
generator. In addition to the above measures, the special maintenance personnel of the carbon brush
should be notified to handle the problem until the exception is eliminated. The generator should be
paralleled off from the power grid when the trouble can not be removed by thee special
maintenance personnel. If the strong spark occurs and the generator can not continue to run, report
to the shift supervisor to shut down immediately.
Abnormal operation of excitation system should be eliminated immediately. If the operators
are unable to solve the problem, they should contact the special maintenance personnel in time.
49
5. Operation Procedures for Auxiliary Power System

5.1 Overview
5.1.1 The 6KV and 380/220V power supply system is adopted for plant power. The 6KV system
has 6KV auxiliary unit A and unit B sections. The power source is respectively taken from the high-
voltage auxiliary transformer and #2 startup/standby transformer, and each section is equipped with
quick cut-off device, to realize the quick cutting off of auxiliary power.
5.1.2 380/220V auxiliary power system adopts power supply mode of power center (PC) and motor
control center (MCC). The PC power source is supplied by the low voltage auxiliary transformer,
and the MCC power source comes from each PC sections.
5.1.3 Two low-voltage unit transformers supply power to #3A and 3B generators low-voltage
auxiliary equipment through PCA and PCB sections respectively, and MCC power comes from the
PC section.
5.1.4 A low-voltage common transformer is provided to supply power to the common system of
two units through the PCA and PCB sections, and MCC power comes from the PC section.
5.1.5 A low-voltage standby transformer is provided as the standby power source for low-voltage
PC section, common PC section and electrostatic precipitation PC section of the two sets. When the
owner requires to change the switch access mode on 6KV high-voltage side of the low-voltage
standby transformer, in addition to the normal 30BBA08 switch of 6KV unit A section of #3A
generator designed by the design institute, the 40BBA08 switch of 6KV unit A section of #3B
generator is provided on the 6KV high-voltage side of the low-voltage standby transformer. The
two switches are interlocking. Either switch is in the "Service" position and the other one is in the
"Maintenance" position.
5.1.6 Two chemical water and hydraulic transformers backing up each other as well as two sections
of PC busbars are provided to supply power to chemical water and adjacent loads.
5.1.7 Two dedusting transformers are set up to supply power to two boilers’ electric precipitator and
compressed air system load respectively through the PC A section and PC B section of electric
precipitation.
5.1.8 Two coal handling transformers and two coal handling PC sections are provided to supply
power to coal handling system and nearby coal yards and reused water loads.
5.1.9 Two wharf transformers and wharf PC section are set up to supply power to wharf loads.
5.1.10 #3A/3B unit shares a ship unloader. The power supply is from 30BBB17 switch of 6KV unit
B section of #3A unit to 6KV high-voltage side of ship unloader transformer. All load powers of
ship unloader system is connected from 380V low-voltage side of ship unloader transformer.
5.1.11 The emergency security section is normally powered by the 380V low-voltage unit PC A
section and PC B section of the two units, and the units are backed up each other through the tie
switch. In the case of auxiliary power failure, each unit has a diesel generator starting with the
emergency security section load.
50
5.2 State Division of Auxiliary Power Distribution Equipment

A5.2.1 State definition of auxiliary busbar
5.2.1.1 Running state
Busbar work or standby power switch in the "Close" state; busbar work or standby power
switch control, operation power delivery; busbar PT in operation state; busbar low-voltage
protection and power switch protection input.
5.2.1.2 Hot standby state
Busbar work or standby power switch in the "Service" position and "Open" state; busbar work
or standby power switch control, operation power delivery; busbar PT in operation state; busbar
low-voltage protection and power switch protection input.
5.2.1.2 Cold standby state
All switches on the busbar in the "cold standby" or "maintenance" state, the switch control
power and operation power disconnected, and the busbar PT in the isolated position.
5.2.1.3 Maintenance state
All switches on the busbar in the state of "cold standby" or "maintenance"; the work and
standby power switches control and the operating power disconnected, the busbar PT pulled to the
isolation position, and the high/low voltage fuses removed; the busbar reliably grounded; other AC
and DC small bus power cut off according to the requirements of the work order.
5.2.2 State definition for 6KV trolley-type switch:
Trolley-type switch in the "Service" position, the secondary plug in the "Plug in" position,
protection input, control and operation power delivery, change-over switch in the "Remote" position,
and the switch in the "Close" state.
The difference from the operation state is only that the switch is in the "Open" state.
Trolley-type switch in the "Test" position, the secondary plug in the "Plug in" position, switch
control power off, energy storage power cut, change-over switch in the "Local" position.
Trolley-type switch in the "Maintenance" position, the secondary plug in the "Unplug" position,
switch control and operation power cut, change-over switch in the "Local" position.
5.2.3 State definition for 380V drawer-type switch
51
The drawer-type switch is in the "Service" position, protection input, control and operation
power delivery, and the switch is in the "Close" state.
The difference from the operation state is only that the switch is in the "Open" state.
52
Drawer-type switch in the "Test" position, that is, the primary plug disconnected, the
secondary plug in the "Plug in" position, and the switch control power disconnected.
The drawer-type switch in the "Maintenance" or "Disconnect" position, the secondary plug is
in the "Unplug" position, and the switch control and operation power off.
5.3 Operation Mode of Auxiliary Power System
5.3.1 Operation mode of 6KV auxiliary power system
5.3.1.1 6kV auxiliary power is divided into two segments of operating busbar of unit A and unit B.
The two busbars run in segment under normal conditions. The #2 startup and standby transformer is
used as the starting standby power. A quick switching device for auxiliary power is installed
between the operating and standby power. When the operating power fails and tripping occurs, the
quick switching device for auxiliary power is used to realize the quick switching to standby power.
5.3.1.2 The loads connected to 6KV unit section of each unit include two electric feed pumps,
condensate pumps and circulating water pumps, four coal mills, two primary fans, blowers and
induced draft fans, one ship unloader, unit transformer, circulating water transformer, electrostatic
precipitation transformer, coal handling transformer, hydraulic and chemical water transformer,
wharf transformer, low-voltage standby transformer, and common transformer, etc.
5.3.2 Operation mode of 380V auxiliary system
5.3.2.1 In normal operation, the protection of transformer, operating power switch and contact
switch should be put into operation, busbar PT should be put into operation, and the corresponding
low-voltage protection and automatic device should be put into operation. The standby power
switch is in the "hot standby" state.
5.3.2.2 Operation mode of 380V auxiliary MCC system
1) For a single power MCC, the power feeder switch and the incoming switch should be closed
when running normally.
2) For the MCC with dual power and electric lockout incoming switch, one power is in service
in normal operation, the other power is used as standby for linkage, the two switching circuits on
feeder side are closed, the operating power incoming switch is closed, and the standby power
incoming switch is used as standby for linkage.
3) In normal operation, the protection of MCC busbar power switch should be put into
operation, busbar PT should be put into operation, and the corresponding low-voltage protection
and automatic device should be put into operation.
5.4 Running and Operation of Auxiliary Power System
5.4.1 General requirements for electrical operation
53
5.4.1.1 Electrical operation must comply with the relevant provisions of Safety Regulations,
superior dispatcher regulations and 25 countermeasures. If any conflict is found with the above
regulations in the operation, the operation must be stopped and the cause should be found out.
5.4.1.2 The operation to change the state of electrical equipment must be signed off and approved
by the shift supervisor and follow the operation order or the procedure for power cut and delivery
operation.
5.4.1.3 Before power delivery to the electrical equipment, check whether the maintenance work
order is terminated and safety measures are removed or there is the written statement of
maintenance personnel that "equipment can be put into operation". The power should be delivered
only after the conditions of the inspection site are normal, the insulation of equipment is measured
up to the requirement, and it is confirmed the operating conditions.
5.4.1.4 Before electrical equipment are powered off, load distribution should be adjusted in advance,
and under normal circumstances, the operation of the auxiliary system should not affect the normal
operation of the unit.
5.4.2 Technical principles for switching operation
5.4.2.1 In the power cutoff operation, first disconnect the power switch (or contactor), and after
checking the switch is disconnected and the corresponding current indication is zero, pull the
disconnector. When puling the disconnector, first the disconnector on the load side, and then the
one on the power side. The sequence for power delivery is reverse.
5.4.2.2 busbar power cutoff and delivery should be made under no-load condition. When power is
delivered, close the switch with protection on the power side, and then close the switch on the load
side. The sequence for power cutoff is reverse.
5.4.2.3 When the transformer is powered on, close the switch on the high-voltage power side, and
then the one on the low-voltage load side. The sequence for power cutoff is reverse.
5.4.3 Precautions
5.4.3.1 The 6KV trolley-type switch should be operated remotely in the control room. The
close/open button on the switchboard is only used for switch test or tripping when no fault occurs to
the switch body.
5.4.3.2 The uninterrupted switching of auxiliary power must be in the same electrical system, and
the voltage difference generally does not exceed 5% of the rated voltage. When there is a
synchronizing device, the synchronizing device must be put into operation. When synchronizing is
not allowed in the accident, the short-time power off switching should be adopted.
5.4.3.3 The thermal control and other interlocking circuits should be considered when the switch is
tested in the test position.
5.4.3.4 When the disconnector has interlocking function with the switch or grounding disconnector,
the operation should not be unlocked without permission. The unlocking of operation should be
subject to the approval of the shift supervisor. The unlocking of operation of any important
54
equipment should also subject to the approval of leader of the project department, and carried out
according to the command of shift supervisor and under the supervision of special officer.
5.4.3.5 Requirements of auxiliary power operation for protection and automatic devices:
1) Electrical equipment is prohibited to operate without protection. Relay protection and
automatic device should be put into the operation before power delivery, and the setting and correct
operating and switching mode should be observed.
2) When the main protection of the equipment needs to be stopped in operation, the consent of
the competent dispatcher or the shift supervisor of the equipment should be obtained, and the
approval of leaders of the project department and the owner should also be obtained for the
important protection that may affect the operation of the unit. The stopping of backup protection for
auxiliary equipment should be consented by the shift supervisor.
3) When busbar and PT are running normally, no busbar low-voltage protection should be
stopped.
4) When the normal operation of busbar needs to stop PT maintenance of busbar, quick
switching device and low-voltage protection of busbar should be stopped first to prevent load
switch tripping. The PT should be powered on when it is restored, and after confirming that the
voltage indication is normal, the low-voltage protection and quick switching device can be used.
5) When PT is being maintained, the relevant relay protection should not be started by mistake
and it should be stopped in advance if necessary, such as voltage blocking overcurrent.
6) For the busbar with automatic power switching device, the automatic power switching
device should be stopped before stopping the busbar, and it can not be put into use after the busbar
is powered on.
5.4.4 Regulation on switching mode of 6KV auxiliary power quick switching device
5.4.4.1 Manual starting and paralleling switching mode is adopted for switching in normal operation,
and "simultaneous switching" mode is unsuitable unless under special circumstances.
5.4.4.2 When the system is in normal operation mode, the automatic emergency series switching
mode of the busbar quick switching device should be enabled to facilitate disconnection and then
connection of the switching power after in case of emergency. It is not appropriate to use the
emergency simultaneous switching mode to prevent the operating power switch from not opening
which may expand the fault.
5.4.4.3 Manual starting can switch the power in two directions, while automatic starting can only
switch the operating power to the standby power.
5.4.4.4 When the operating power and standby power are in non-synchronous system, the quick
switching device should be locked out. In special cases when the power must be switched to isolate
the fault equipment, manual disconnection of the operating power switch should be made, so that
the standby power switch can start the switching mode automatically (abnormal starting mode).
55
When the abnormal starting mode is not used, the standby power switch should be manually closed
after the busbar is out of power.
5.4.5 Power cutoff and delivery operation for MCC
5.4.5.1 For MCC with single power, when power is delivered, first check all load switches on the
MCC are disconnected, measure the insulation of MCC busbar and feeder cables meet the
requirements with power off, set the MCC incoming power switch and feeder switch to the
operating position, then input the switch control and power and the relevant protection, set its
control mode switch to the "Remote" position before closing the switch on the DCS operation
screen, and finally deliver power to the MCC loads as required. When power is cut off, first
completely cut off power to MCC load, and then disconnect the MCC incoming power switch and
feeder switch and power the control power and power.
5.4.5.2 For MCC with dual power and mechanical lockout incoming disconnector, when power is
delivered, first check all load switches on MCC are disconnected, and measure the insulation of
power cable (two circuits) and MCC busbar up to the requirements with power off, set the MCC
feeder switch and incoming power switch to the operating position, then input switch control power
and power and input the relevant protection, set the control mode switch to the "Local" position,
input the incoming power switch to the power I (or power II) position, then close the two power
feeder switches on the DCS operation screen, and finally deliver power to the MCC loads as
required. If power is delivered for the first time or after the circuit is changed, it is necessary to
check the phase sequence of two powers. When the power is cut off, first power off all MCC loads,
and then disconnect the MCC incoming power switch and feeder switch, and disconnect the power
before pulling off the MCC incoming disconnecting, and finally disconnect the feeder power switch
control power.
5.5 Exception of Auxiliary Power System and Troubleshooting
5.5.1 Treatment of switch refusal to close
5.5.1.1 Check whether the operation procedure is correct and whether the relevant switches are in
correct position.
5.5.1.2 Check whether the operation and power switches trip, control circuit is broken, and the
secondary plug is in good contact.
5.5.1.3 Check whether the thermal condition is met and the accident button contact is short
connected.
5.5.1.4 After the cause has not been verified through above inspection, or the trouble can not be
removed, notify the maintenance personnel to inspect and treat, and take safety measures as
necessary.
5.5.2 Treatment of switch refusal to open
5.5.2.1 Check whether the operation procedure is correct and whether the relevant switches are in
correct position.
56
5.5.2.2 Check whether the operation and power switches trip, control circuit is broken, the
secondary plug is in good contact, and the mechanism is jammed.
5.5.2.3 If no fault is found through the above-mentioned inspection and the situation is urgent, the
local mechanical tripping can be carried out quickly. Otherwise, notify the electrical maintenance
personnel immediately to treat it.
5.5.3 Treatment of switch misclosing:
If the switch is misclosed, it should be disconnected immediately, regardless of standby or
maintenance state. If the misclosing causes short circuit and the protection acts to trip, the circuit
should be checked in detail immediately.
5.5.4 Treatment of switch misopening
5.5.4.1 When the switch of 6KV auxiliary high-voltage motor is misopened, contact the duty
personnel to close the switch immediately.
5.5.4.2 When the auxiliary power switch is switched off by mistake, after the standby power is
switched on and checking the voltage is normal, switch over to the original operation mode. If the
standby power is not switched on automatically or the standby power is cut off, and there is no
protection action signal, the switch misopened should still be powered on.
5.5.4.3 When a trolley-type switch fails and the equipment must be powered on quickly, the
maintenance personnel should be notified immediately to call the standby trolley-type switch with
the same capacity and the same secondary wiring.
5.5.5 Troubleshooting for PT and CT
5.5.5.1 During normal operation of secondary circuit, the secondary circuit of voltage transformer
should not be shorted and the secondary circuit of current transformer should not be opened.
5.5.5.2 When PT and CT secondary circuits fail which makes the instrument indication abnormal,
monitor the equipment according to the indication of other instruments as far as possible. Try not
change the operation mode of the primary equipment, to avoid the misjudgment of the equipment
operation caused by the indication abnormality of instrument.
5.5.5.3 When PT fails, check whether the secondary plug auxiliary contact is in good condition, the
secondary side switch trips, and the high-voltage fuse is burnt out. When any fault is found, timely
remove it. The secondary side open circuit that endangers the safety of personnel and equipment,
should be treated as soon as possible.
5.5.5.4 As PT/CT failure may cause malfunction of the protection and automatic devices. In this
case, immediately notify the relay personnel to determine the protection and automatic devices that
should be stopped. Put it into service after troubleshooting.
5.5.5.5 PT/CT fails and affects metering of electricity. Correctly record the starting time, recovery
time, electricity readings, load and other parameters,
5.5.6 6.3KV busbar failure
57
5.5.6.1 Phenomenon
1) Busbar service incoming power switch trips and flickers, busbar voltmeter indicates zero,
and send out sound and light alarm.
2) Low-voltage protection on busbar acts.
3) The switch of the transformer powered by the busbar trips and flickers.
4) The relevant protection on busbar acts and alarm sounds.
1) Check the protection action and observe the running state of the auxiliary equipment.
2) Use the standby power to restore the power supply to 380V PC busbar.
3) Check whether there is a switch on the bus that should not be tripped but not, judge whether
it is an override tripping caused by switch failure according to the protection situation. If it is an
override tripping, the failed switch should be disconnected and isolated, and the power supply of
6KV busbar should be restored.
4) If it is checked out that the busbar fails, take safety measures and contact maintenance
personnel to treat it.
5) If there is no obvious fault, all the trolley-type switches on the voltage-losing busbar should
be disconnected, pull PT to the isolation position, and then measure the phase-to-phase insulation
and phase-to-ground insulation of the busbar. If the insulation fails to meet the requirement,
transform the voltage-losing busbar into the maintenance state and notify the maintenance personnel
to treat it. If the insulation meets the requirement, use the standby power to normally charge the no-
load busbar, and then check the load insulation meets the requirement one by one before power
delivery. If the load insulation fails to meet the requirement, isolate the load and transform it into
the maintenance state and notify maintenance personnel to treat it.
5.5.7 Tripping of auxiliary busbar power switch
5.5.7.1 Phenomenon
1) Before tripping, the meter pointer beats and the current increases.
2) The busbar service incoming power switch trips and flickers.
3) Accident sound alarm sounds, and the corresponding protection fails and related alarm
window goes on.
4) Busbar voltage may disappear.
1) Check whether the automatic switching device acts, if it acts successfully, reset the signal
and find out the cause for switch tripping.
58
2) If the automatic switching device does not act, there is no protection action signal and it is
verified that the operating power switch is opened, manually close the standby power switch once.
3) If the protection acts or standby power switch trips after put into service or manually closed,
exit the automatic switching device and handle it according to the busbar fault.
5.5.8 6KV single-phase grounding
5.5.8.1 Phenomenon
1) The alarm bell rings, and grounding alarm window of a 6KV busbar goes on.
2) The grounding phase voltage indication becomes zero or close to zero, and the non-fault
phase display line voltage or phase voltage indication rises.
1) If any zero-sequence protection acts and trips and the system grounding phenomenon is
eliminated (three-phase voltage is symmetrical), isolate the tripping equipment and check in detail
to eliminate the fault.
2) if no zero-sequence protection acts, it may be that the system is single-phase grounded
through transition resistance. If no obvious fault can be found, cut off power one by one in a
sequence as follows:
a. Just started device.
b. Not affect the unit output (with standby) load.
c. important load.
d. Low-voltage auxiliary transformer (switching to standby transformer).
e. 6KV operating power incoming line (switching to standby power).
f. If the fault phenomena still exist after treatment as above, it is proved that the grounding
fault is on the busbar, and the failed busbar must be stopped as soon as possible.
g. If it is identified that the grounding point is above the operating power switch, switch to the
auxiliary power and then apply for shutdown and troubleshooting.
h. The grounding operation time of 6KV system should not exceed 2 hours. Insulating shoes
and gloves should be worn when checking the distribution devices in the grounding section.
5.5.9 Voltage loss of 380V PC section busbar
5.5.9.1 Phenomenon
1) Busbar incoming power switch trips and flickers, and send out sound and light signal.
2) The voltmeter on busbar indicates "0".
3) The related protection acts and alarm window goes on.
59
1) Check the protection action

2) Check whether there are any obvious fault points on the busbar.
3) Check the power supply of MCC provided by this busbar. If the standby power is not linked,
manually disconnect the operating power and put into standby power.
4) If there are obvious fault points on the busbar, the fault points should be isolated as far as
possible.
5.9.2.5 If no obvious fault point is found, all switches on the busbar should be disconnected, and the
insulated bus bar should be charged to the no-load busbar after checking the insulation of the busbar
meet the requirement. And then, measure the insulation of the loads in urgent need of power one by
one up to the requirement and power them on for commissioning Finally, locate the fault points and
isolate them, and notify the maintenance personnel to handle it.
60
6. Operation Procedures for Transformer

6.1 Overview
6.1.1 There are 24 transformers in the Jeneponto Power Plant. Among them, there are two main
transformers, one startup/standby transformer, two high-voltage transformers, one common
transformer, one low-voltage standby transformer, two excitation transformers, two unit
transformers, two dust removal transformers, two chemical water transformers, two coal
Troubleshooting transformers, two circulating water transformers, two wharf transformers, two
sodium hypochlorite transformers, and one ship unloader transformer.
6.1.2 The #3A and 3B main transformers are SFP-171000/150 three-phase oil-immersed forced-oil
circulation air-cooled double-winding no-load voltage-regulating boost transformer, startup/standby
transformer is SFZ-20000/157.5 three-phase oil-immersed natural oil circulation air-cooled on-load
voltage-regulating step-down transformer, auxiliary transform is SF-20000/13.8 three-phase oil-
immersed natural oil circulation air-cooled no-load voltage-regulating step-down transformer, and
other low voltage transformers are indoor dry-type transformers.
6.2 Technical Specification for Equipment
6.2.1 Specification for #3A/3B unit high-voltage transformer equipment:7.1 Closed Busbar
#3A/B high-voltage #2 startup/standby

Name #3A/B main transformer
auxiliary transformer transformer
Model SFP-171000/150 SF-20000/13.8 SFZ-20000/157.5
Rated capacity 171000/171000KVA 200000/20000KVA 20000/20000/6666.7KVA
Rated voltage
150±4×2.5%/13.8 13.8±2×2.5%/6.3 157.5±8×1.25%/6.3-6.3
(KV)
Rated current
658.2/7154.1 836.7/1832.9 73.3/1832.9/366.6
(A)
Rated frequency
50 50 50
(Hz)
Voltage
No-load voltage regulation No-load voltage regulation Loaded voltage regulation
regulation mode
Voltage
regulation / / HV winding
position
Voltage
/ / —10%〜+10%
regulation range
Short-circuit
impedance 14 10% 10.5%
(%)
Wiring group Ynd11 Dyn11 YN,yn0+d
Neutral point The high voltage side directly grounded; Low voltage resistance Low voltage resistance
grounding mode and the low voltage side not grounded. grounded grounded
No. of phases 3 3 3
Cooling mode OFAF ONAF(70%/100%) ONAF/ONAF(75%)
Cooler 4 4 4
61
(Group)
Insulation
F F F
grade
TBEA Transformer Co., Ltd. TBEA Transformer Co., Ltd. TBEA Transformer Co., Ltd.
Manufacturer
(Hengyang Branch) (Hengyang Branch) (Hengyang Branch)
6.2.2 Specification for #3A/3B unit low-voltage transformer equipment:
Electrostatic
Name Unit transformer precipitation Common transformer LV standby transformer
transformer
Model SCB10-1600/6.3 SCB10-1000/6.3 SCB10-1000/6.3/0.4 SCB10-1600/6.3/0.4
Rated capacity
1600 1000 1000 1600
(KVA)
Rated voltage
6.3±2×2.5%/0.4 6.3±2×2.5%/0.4 6.3±2×2.5%/0.4 6.3±2×2.5%/0.4
(KV)
Rated current
146.6/2309.4A 91.6/1443.4 91.6/1443.4 146.6/2309.4
(A)
Rated frequency
50 50 50 50
(Hz)
Wiring group Dyn11 Dyn11 Dyn11 Dyn11
Short-circuit
impedance 7.73/7.69 6 6.01 7.71
(%)
No. of phases 3 3 3 3
Insulation grade F F F F
Cooling mode AN/AF AN/AF AN/AF AN/AF
Cooler Three groups of fans Three groups of fans Three groups of fans Three groups of fans
Low voltage side Low voltage side Low voltage side Low voltage side
Grounding type
directly grounded directly grounded directly grounded directly grounded
TBEA Tianjin TBEA Tianjin TBEA Tianjin TBEA Tianjin

Manufacturer
Transformers Co., Ltd. Transformers Co., Ltd. Transformers Co., Ltd. Transformers Co., Ltd.
Circulating water Chemical water Coal handling

Name Wharf transformer
transformer transformer transformer
Model SCB10-400/6.3 SCB10-1000/6.3 SCB10-315/6.3 SCB10-1600/6.3
Rated capacity
400 1000 315 1600
(KVA)
Rated voltage
6.3±2×2.5%/0.4 6.3±2×2.5%/0.4 6.3±2×2.5%/0.4 6.3±2×2.5%/0.4
(KV)
Rated current
36.7/577.4 91.6/1443.4 28.9/454.7 146.6/2309.4
(A)
Rated frequency
50 50 50 50
(Hz)
62
Wiring group Dyn11 Dyn11 Dyn11 Dyn11

Short-circuit
impedance 4.5 6 4 8
(%)
No. of phases 3 3 3 3
Insulation grade F F F F
Cooling mode AN/AF AN/AF AN/AF AN/AF
Cooler Three groups of fans Three groups of fans Three groups of fans Three groups of fans
Low voltage side Low voltage side Low voltage side directly Low voltage side
Grounding type
directly grounded directly grounded grounded directly grounded
TBEA Tianjin TBEA Tianjin TBEA Tianjin TBEA Tianjin

Manufacturer
Transformers Co., Ltd. Transformers Co., Ltd. Transformers Co., Ltd. Transformers Co., Ltd.
Sodium hypochlorite
Name Excitation transformer Ship unloader transformer
transformer
ZSCB10-
Model ZSCB-260/6
1250/13.8/0.43
Rated capacity
1250 185/260
(KVA)
Rated voltage
13.8 6KV/2×0.13
(KV)
Rated current
52.3/1678 18A
(A)
Rated frequency
50 50
(Hz)
Wiring group Yd11 Yyn0-6
Short-circuit
impedance 5.96 6.32
(%)
No. of phases III 3/6
Insulation grade F F
Cooling mode AN/AF FN/AN
Cooler Three groups of fans Three groups of fans
Low voltage side Low voltage side
Grounding type
directly grounded directly grounded
Jiangyin Tianma Power
Sunten Electric
Manufacturer Supply Making Co.,
Equipment Co., Ltd.
Ltd.
6.3 Transformer Operation Conditions and Related Tests (Responsibility of Maintenance Personnel)
6.3.1 The primary insulation resistance of the transformer is measured up to the requirement. The
winding of oil immersed transformer above 1KV is tested by 2500V megameter, and its value
should not be less than 1MΩ/KV. The insulation resistance on the high-voltage side and insulation
63
to ground of 6KV dry-type transformer are tested by 2500V megameter, which should not be less
than 300MΩ, and insulation to ground on the low voltage side is tested by 500V megameter, which
should not be less than 100MΩ. The minimum insulation resistance of dry-type transformer in wet
environment is 2MΩ/KV. When measuring the transformer insulation, connector of neutral point to
the ground (or through resistance grounding) should be disconnected, and before the measurement,
electricity testing and discharge should be carried out. After each measurement, it needs to
discharge to the ground.
6.3.2 Opening/Closing test of switch on each side of transformer.
6.3.3 Interlocking action test of each side of transformer.
6.3.4 The transformer should be checked that the phase sequence is correct, after new installation or
through possibly changed phase sequence (including cable reconnection and the maintenance of the
corresponding voltage transformer).
6.3.5 Transformers newly installed or internally maintained should also receive winding DC
resistance and necessary withstand voltage tests. The connection group grade and voltage ratio
should be measured; the polarity and no-load voltage ratio of CT should be checked when the
corresponding CT is maintained.
6.3.6 Transformer where the secondary or protection circuit is maintained, should be correctly
tested for switches, protection transmission and loads.
6.3.7 When maintaining the temperature measuring circuit and temperature control system,
including the setting modification, the simulating temperature and current starting tests should be
carried out.
6.3.8 After the maintenance of the on-load voltage regulator, the tap changer adjustment test should
be carried out for one cycle with power off. After it is verified to be normal through test, set it to the
appropriate tap position.
6.3.9 After replacing oil, the transformer should be analyzed for oil quality.
6.3.10 Transformers newly installed or overhauled for coils and cores should undergo 3~5 times of
impact closing tests before commissioning. Ferroresonance should be prevented, and when
necessary, adjust the relay protection setting value. Tripping of transformer main protection must be
automatically enabled.
6.4 Transformer inspection before commissioning
6.4.1 Related item inspection
6.4.1.1 Check whether the work order of transformer maintenance is terminated, and there should
be written statement that "the operation can be resumed".
6.4.1.2 Check whether the temporary ground leads, short-circuit wires and other temporary safety
measures are removed, and permanent barriers and signs are restored
64
6.4.1.3 The necessary test items of the transformer have been completed, and the insulation
resistance values of the transformer body and cable are tested up to the requirements.
6.4.1.4 The primary or secondary equipment related to the commissioning can be put into operation
without no exception.
6.4.1.5 The related relay protection, fire control and other facilities of the transformer are in good
conditions.
6.4.2 Oil immersed transformer body inspection
6.4.2.1 Oil of transformer conservator and bushing is transparent and the level is normal.
6.4.2.2 tap changer site indication position of on-load voltage regulating transformer is consistent
with actual requirement, namely remote control and local control is consistent.
6.4.2.3 Pressure relief valve is in good condition, respirator system is smooth, and silica gel color is
normal.
6.4.2.4 Oil pipeline valves of conservator, cooler and gas relay are opened and closed normally, gas
relay is filled with oil, and there is no gas in the gas collector box.
6.4.2.5 The arresters on each side of the transformer are put into service, and the leakage current
meter and discharge counter are normal.
6.4.2.6 Body terminal box and cooler control box are sealed well, and lighting and heating systems
are normal.
6.4.2.7 Transformer shell and core are reliably grounded.
6.4.2.8 Transformer cooler power switch test is normal, and oil pump and fan run in normally.
6.4.3 Dry-type transformer body inspection
6.4.3.1 Transformer body cable joint has good contact.
6.4.3.2 Transformer lead cable has no friction with shell and tray (or cable trench).
6.4.3.3 The status of small switch and fuse in the transformer temperature control box is correct,
and terminals and relays are normal.
6.4.3.4 Transformer air cooling system can be put into automatic operation after manual test.
6.5 Operation Requirements for Transformers
6.5.1 Transformer running and exit should be subject to the command of shift supervisor and the
work order should be filled in.
6.5.2 Auxiliary transformer should be charged from high voltage side to low voltage side, and full-
voltage reverse charging from low voltage side to high voltage side is prohibited.
6.5.3 According to the switching operation principle, the transformer should be powered first to the
power side with protection and then to the load side.
6.5.4 It is prohibited to use disconnector to pull on no-load transformers.
65
6.5.5 Before the transformer with neutral point directly grounded or through resistance grounded is
put into operation, its neutral point should be directly grounded or resistance grounded.
6.5.6 When the transformer is charged, the tripping main protection must be automatically enabled.
There should be at least one set of main protection input during normal operation.
6.5.7 Transformers newly installed or with internal and external wiring changed and with wiring
group changed must be checked for the phase sequence and phase position before commissioning.
6.5.8 The newly commissioning transformer should undergo five times of impulse closing tests, and
the transformer with the coil changed should undergo at least three times of impulse closing tests.
6.6 Normal Operation and Maintenance of Transformer
6.6.1 Operation provisions for transformer
6.6.1.1 The allowable operating voltage of a transformer in operation is within ±5% of its
corresponding tap changer voltage, and then the transformer can be operated with rated capacity
load.
6.6.1.2 The top oil temperature of a naturally cooled or air-cooled oil-immersed transformer should
generally not exceed 85°C, 95°C at most. The top oil temperature of a forced oil circulating air-
cooled transformer should generally not exceed 75°C, 85°C at most. The top oil temperature rise
must not exceed 55°C.
6.6.1.3 For dry-type transformers, the temperature rise of each part should not exceed the following
requirements:
1) F class insulation 100°C.
2) E class insulation 75°C.
3) H class insulation 125°C.
4) B class insulation 80°C.
6.6.1.4 For forced oil circulating cooling transformer, the cooler should be put in before the
commissioning of the transformer or when the transformer is powered. The number of coolers to be
operated can be reduced appropriately at low load, especially for transformers with high oil flow
rate.
6.6.1.5 The transformer can run under the conditions of normal overload and emergency overload.
Normal overload can be used frequently, and emergency overload can only be used in emergency.
Defective transformers are not allowed to run under overload.
The requirements for overload operation are as follows:
1) When running under overload, all coolers of the transformer must be put into use.
2) For the overload operation of oil-immersed self-cooling transformer, the overload value
should not exceed 30% of the rated capacity, and the highest top oil temperature should not exceed
95°C.
66
3) For dry-type transformers, the overload value should be limited to the manufacturer's
specified value, that is, 115% of rated capacity when all the fans are run. The temperature is
controlled below the alarm value.
4) Transformer emergency overload generally should not exceed half an hour. The cause, time
and load value of emergency overload should be recorded.
6.7 Paralleling Operation of Transformer
6.7.1 The paralleling operation of transformers should meet the following requirements
6.7.1.1 The winding wiring group is the same.
6.7.1.2 The ratio of transformation is the same.
6.7.1.3 Impedance voltage is similar.
6.7.2 Precautions for Transformer Paralleling
6.5.7 Transformers newly installed or with internal and external wiring changed and with wiring
group changed must be checked for the phase before commissioning.
6.7.2.2 The short-time paralleling operation time of the transformer during the switching operation
should be as short as possible, and the switching device should be adopted as fast as possible.
6.7.2.3 Due to the different wiring groups of transformers, it is not possible to supply power
simultaneously to a certain power load center. Switching power supply also needs to use the reverse
way of opening first and then closing.
6.8 Operation of Transformer tap changer
6.8.1 Adjustment of tap changer of the no-load regulating transformer is usually carried out by
maintenance personnel. The transformer should be powered off and safety measures should be
taken before adjusting the tap position. When regulating, rotate the tap changer for several times to
eliminate oxide film and oil stain. After regulation, the contact resistance should be measured and
meet the requirement.
6.8.2 Regulation of tap changer of the loaded regulating transformer is usually electrically operated
remotely. When operating, jogging and step-by-step regulation are required, and current and voltage
changes and local tap-changer changes should be monitored.
6.8.3 In the process of loaded regulation, if tap changer acts continuously, the power of on-load
regulator of transformer should be cut off immediately, and then the tap changer should be set to the
appropriate position by manual method local under no load condition, and the tap changer should be
maintained. Recording in details should be made then.
6.8.4 When the position of tap changer is calibrated or remote electric regulation can not be used
under special circumstances, local electric or manual operation mode is allowed. The power of the
electric regulating mechanism should be cut off when the regulation is operated manually. At the
same time, personal protective measures should be taken, such as laying insulating pad and putting
on insulating gloves.
67
6.8.5 In manual operation, step-by-step operation is also required, to reach the leveling stop area (i.e.
the section marked in green), and the digital position of tap changer will also change.
6.9 Operation Provisions for Protection of Transformer Gas
6.9.1 For the transformer in normal operation, automatic tripping should be enabled for its heavy
gas, and signal should be enabled for its light gas.
6.9.2 In the process of the transformer in operation oil filtering , oil filling, adsorbent or oil-
immersed pump replacing for the transformer in operation, signal should be changed for heavy gas.
6.9.3 When handling the defect in the gas relay or gas protection secondary circuit, the heavy gas
protection signal change should be made.
6.9.4 Heavy gas signal should be input when it is necessary to discharge gas or oil in case of the oil
level changes caused by the blockage of respirator or the oil level rises due to high temperature
weather, or when gas sampling is required.
6.9.5 Heavy gas signal should not be changed when oil level drops rapidly due to a large amount of
oil leakage or when oil level is abnormal for unknown reasons.
6.9.6 During the period when the heavy gas signal is changed due to the above reasons, the tripping
must be switched on for main protection such as transformer differential action and quick breaking.
6.9.7 After the maintenance work is over, the gas protection can be switched to tripping only when
there is no gas emission after observing for 24 hours when oil circuit starts to work.
6.10 Operation Regulation for Transformer Cooling System
6.10.1 Operation mode of main transformer cooler
6.10.1.1 The main transformer is equipped with four sets of coolers. Each cooler is equipped with
two cooling fans and one oil-immersed pump. The main transformer cooler has two ways of power
supply. When it is running normally, they should be both switched on, one way to work and the
other way to interlock and stand by.
6.10.1.2 When the main transformer is operating, its cooling device should be put into operation.
After the main transformer is withdrawn for 30 minutes, the fan and oil pump are stopped. The
main transformer is not allowed to run without cooling device.
6.10.1.3 For the main transformer, it is only allowed to switch on one group to be "auxiliary" and
the other three groups to be "in service".
6.10.1.4 After the cooler is withdrawn, the time allowed for full load operation of the main
transformer is 20min.
6.10.2 Operation mode of high-voltage auxiliary transformer cooler
6.10.2.1 High-voltage auxiliary transformer adopts air-cooling mode, and is equipped with a total of
four groups of coolers. Each high-voltage auxiliary transformer is provided with a local cooler
68
control box, and powered by two sources. In normal operation, two power switches should be
closed, one for working and the other for interlocking and standby.
6.10.2.2 The "automatic/manual" switch KK of the high-voltage auxiliary transformer cooler should
be set to the "automatic" position under normal condition; the control "automatic/manual" switch
6KK of heater of the cooler control cabinet should be set to the "automatic" position.
6.10.2.3 When all the coolers are out of operation, the allowable time for full-load operation of the
transformer is . When the upper oil temperature has not reached 75°C, it is allowed to rise to
75°C, but the maximum operating time after the cooler is removed is not more than 1 hour.
6.10.3 Operation mode of low-voltage auxiliary dry-type cooler
6.10.3.1 Cooling fan should be in automatic control mode during normal operation of low-voltage
auxiliary transformer; when automatic operation fails, manual mode can be switched on. When the
load of transformer is low, the fan can be stopped according to the specific conditions and the
monitoring should be strengthened.
6.10.3.2 Transformer temperature control box should be put into use at the same time with the
transformer. The fan should be manual started to test and there should be no exception.
6.10.3.3 For transformers frequently overloaded or operating in high ambient temperature, the
cooling fans should be always operated.
6.10.3.4 If the temperature control system fails or the cooling fan fails to operate normally, the
transformer can be operated for a long time under the allowable load condition, but the temperature
monitoring should be strengthened to ensure the overtemperature alarm and tripping circuit are
normal.
6.10.3.5 When transformer is free from fault and temperature measuring device is abnormal, the
transformer cooling fan should be manually operated, and infrared surface temperature
measurement and other means should be used to strengthen the temperature monitoring of the
transformer, and comparison with similar transformers should be made, and timely contact with
maintenance personnel should be made for troubleshooting.
6.10.3.6 Low-voltage auxiliary dry-type transformers are insulated for class and the cooling mode is
AN/AF. The cooling fan can be started manually and run uninterruptedly. It can also be started and
stopped automatically according to the winding temperature of the transformer in the automatic
mode. Under the automatic mode, the starting temperature of the fan is 100°C, the stop temperature
is 80°C, the alarm temperature of the transformer is 130°C, and the trip temperature is 150°C.
6.11 Inspection of Transformer in Operation
6.11.1 Transformer has no vibration and abnormal sound, and the corresponding relationship
between temperature rise, oil level and load is normal.
6.11.2 Operation mode of transformer cooler is normal. For the cooling system activated by
temperature control or current automatic control, it should be normal in manual start-up test.
69
6.11.3 Oil temperature and winding thermometer readings are normal, consistent remotely and
locally.
6.11.4 The indicator value of the current meter of lightning arrester leakage on each side of the
transformer is in the normal range, and the discharge counter records normally.
6.11.5 Bushing has no cracks, creepage, corona and so on.
6.11.6 Secondary equipment wiring is normal, without overheating, burnt odor and other abnormal
conditions.
6.11.7 Dry-type transformer temperature indication is correct, temperature measuring device works
normally, and overtemperature alarm and tripping circuit are normal.
6.11.8 Transformer fails and trips, emphatically check whether there is carbon in the oil, blowout
preventer blows out, the body is deformed, and outgoing line is burnt.
6.11.9 In windy, foggy, rainy days and other bad weather, emphatically check the swinging and
flashover of wires.
6.12 Transformer Outage
6.12.1 Operation Regulations for Transformer Outage
6.12.1.1 The neutral point of the transformer is required to be grounded (including resistance
grounded) before power off.
6.12.1.2 For transformer outage, first pull to open the load side switch, then the power side switch.
6.12.1.3 After transformer outage, the whole system should be inspected once and checked for its
status.
6.12.1.4 Transformer should be connected to grounding wire after it is powered off and isolated.
Grounding wire should be first connected to the grounding terminal and then the lead terminal.
6.12.1.5 If transformer insulation value is always low or trends to continuously drop, it is required
to measure the insulation value and record it in the hot state after power failure, for comparison in
the next time of commissioning .
6.12.2 Inspection and maintenance of transformer in standby state
6.12.2.1 Charged standby transformer should follow the requirements for operation state.
6.12.2.2 Hot standby or cold standby transformer should be charged to test once a month.
6.12.2.3 Long-term standby transformer must be measured for the insulation resistance up to the
requirement before it is put into operation. According to the standby state and time, other tests such
as DC resistance measurement, tap changer contact resistance inspection, oil sample laboratory test
and dielectric loss angle measurement should be carried out if necessary.
6.13 Abnormal Operation of Transformer and Troubleshooting
6.13.1 Abnormal operation of transformer
70
6.13.1.1 Transformer should be shut down immediately if one of the following conditions occurs. If
there is standby transformer during operation, it should be put into operation as soon as possible:
1) The noise of transformer increases obviously, and there is crash inside.
2) Serious oil leakage or blowout occurs, and oil level drops below the indication limit of oil
level gauge.
3) The bushing has serious breakage and electric discharge.
4) The on -load regulating switch is seriously fails, the operating mechanism fails, and there is
serious discharge noise in the oil cavity.
5) When the overload on any side of the oil-immersed transformer exceeds the allowable value
and time, or under normal load and cooling conditions, the upper oil temperature of the transformer
is seriously abnormal or exceeds 105°C under normal measuring conditions.
6) Transformer body or on-load regulating switch smokes and catches fire.
7) When a fault endangers the safety of the transformer and the relevant protective devices of
the transformer refuse to act, the personnel on duty should immediately shut down the transformer.
8) When the equipment near the transformer is on fire, explodes or has other conditions, which
pose a serious threat to the transformer, the personnel on duty should immediately shut down the
transformer.
6.13.1.2 When transformer oil temperature rise exceeds the specified limit, the personnel on duty
should check and handle it by the following steps:
1) Transfer load: for the main transformer, unit load can be reduced; for the high-voltage
auxiliary transformer, auxiliary power can be switched on; for the excitation transformer, excitation
current can be reduced; for the low-voltage auxiliary transformer, the system can be changed over
to transfer part of the load (high-power motor) or all the load to another transformer.
2) Check whether the transformer is overloaded and causes the oil temperature to exceed the
limit, and compare with the transformer in normal operation under the same load, and increase the
number of coolers appropriately to enhance the cooling.
3) Check whether the temperature measuring device is accurate.
4) Check the operation of the transformer cooling device, if the reason for the temperature rise
is the failure of the cooling system, and the failure can not be removed in operation, reduce the load
or stop the transformer; if the transformer temperature rises abnormally under normal load and
cooling conditions and it has been inspected that the temperature indication is correct, it should be
considered as inside fault of the transformer, and the transformer should be shut down.
5) When it is found that the oil level of the transformer is significantly lower than the
corresponding to the oil temperature, the cause should be found out and information should be made
to maintenance personnel to refuel the transformer after troubleshooting.
71
6) Oil level of the transformer may be higher than the limit of oil level gauge because of
temperature rise. When it is verified not a false oil level, the maintenance personnel should be
notified to discharge oil so as to drop the oil level to the degree corresponding to the oil temperature
so as to avoid oil spill.
7) When a single-phase grounding occurs in the system, the operation of the transformer with
resistance at the neutral point should be monitored, and the temperature of the grounding resistance
should be within the normal range.
8) For the transformer with temperature protection, if it is found that there is no fault, and the
temperature has risen to the alarm value, application for withdrawal from the temperature protection
can be made, and then the load should be transferred before troubleshooting.
6.13.1.3 Treatment for too high or too low oil level of transformer
1) When the oil level is too low, check whether it is caused by oil leakage, if so, take measures
to stop leakage and shut down the transformer as soon as possible.
2) When serious oil leakage occurs, it is prohibited to switch on the heavy gas should not be
changed to signal and the signal and the transformer should be stopped immediately.
3) When the oil level of transformer is too high, check whether it is caused by respirator (oil
meter, capsule, silica gel) blockage, and try to deal with it.
4) If the oil level exceeds the limit due to the high ambient temperature or heavy load, contact
the oil maintenance personnel to discharge oil.
5) When high oil level leads to blow out of pressure relief valve, if the transformer has tripped,
it can be put into operation only after the necessary oil sample chromatographic test is carried out
up to the requirement; if the pressure relief protection is not tripped, immediately reduce load and
observe and stop the transformer as soon as possible, at this time other main protection must not be
withdrawn.
6.13.2 Troubleshooting for transformer
6.13.2.1 Transformer should be shut down immediately when the following conditions occur.
1) Bushing fails and heavy oil leaks, and oil level declines significantly.
2) The lead joint is heated and melted or has serious electric discharge.
3) The internal noise of the transformer is abnormal, and there is crash inside.
4) Heavy oil leakage occurs to the transformer, and the oil level is lower than the indication
limit of the oil level gauge.
5) Pressure release valve acts, the oil blown out contains visible black or smokes at the same
time.
6) The outer surface of the transformer is obviously distorted or the shell is cracked.
7) The transformer is on fire or flooded or personal safety is threatened.
72
8) Transformer protection device fails, and main protection is lost.

6.13.2.2 Treatment of tripping of transformer in operation
1) Causes:
a. Transformer fails in the protection range.
b. External fault and protection failure or circuit breaker failure cause transformer backup
protection action. (i.e., zero sequence current, voltage, gap overcurrent, compound overcurrent).
c. System operation (i.e. no-load transformer) or external fault causes transformer protection
misoperation. (i.e. differential protection)
d. Secondary circuit failure causes circuit breaker misoperation.
2) Troubleshooting:
a. Check whether the auxiliary power or the security power is connected successfully, check
whether the operating power has been disconnected, check whether the standby power is available,
and ensure the auxiliary power and the security power supply according to the principle of the
restoration of the auxiliary power.
b. If there is a standby transformer, transfer the load of the tripping transformer to the standby
transformer.
c. Determine the cause and nature of tripping based on the protection action, fault recording
and tripping sequence.
d. If the main protection of the transformer acts, find out the cause, isolate the fault point, hand
it over to the maintenance personnel for treatment, and carry out relevant tests and oil quality
analysis if necessary.
e. If the backup protection acts, find out the cause, isolate the fault point, check that the
tripping transformer is normal, and then apply to restore the operation of the tripping transformer.
f. If it is caused by secondary circuit reason or protection malfunction, find out cause as soon
as possible to eliminate, check the tripping transformer is normal and restore the operation of the
tripping transformer.
g. Restore auxiliary equipment tripping in the switching process of auxiliary power.
6.13.2.3 Handling for differential action or overcurrent protection action of transformer
1) Check the relay protection action and the condition of equipment in the field transformer
protection range, and determine whether the equipment fault has occurred.
2) Specially check the oil color, oil level and pressure relief valve of the transformer.
a. Check the accident recollection and fault recorder records, check the current and voltage
fluctuations during transformer tripping.
b. Check whether there is gas in the gas relay, and check gas sample and oil sample.
73
c. If no obvious fault exists, the power on the transformer after its insulation is measured and
meet the requirement, otherwise cut off power for maintenance.
3) Handling for actions of gas protection and pressure relief devices.
a. Check the transformer immediately when the gas protection and pressure releasing device
act to find out whether the actions is caused by the accumulation of air, the decline of oil level, the
secondary circuit fault or the internal fault of the transformer. If there is gas in the gas relay and the
pressure relief device acts, immediately stop the transformer and make record, and notify the
maintenance personnel.
b. When the gas protection trips and other relay protection devices of the transformer act, the
transformer should not be put into operation until the cause is found out and the fault is eliminated.
c. When gas protection acts, inform the maintenance personnel of gas relay to carry out
chromatographic analysis of gas in the relay and gas dissolved in oil, and the results should be
normal; and carry out the necessary electrical tests, and the results should meet the requirement.
And then transformer can be put into operation .
4) Causes for light gas protection action of transformer
a. During the process of oil filtration and refueling, air enters the transformer.
b. Temperature drops, causing oil level to be too low.
c. Failure occurs insider the transformer, and a small amount of gas is produced.
d. Gas protection secondary circuit fails.
e. The cooling system inhales a small amount of air.
5) Handling after light gas protection action of transformer
a. Check the external conditions of transformer, whether the oil level is normal, and whether
there is oil leakage or not.
b. If there is gas in the gas relay, record the gas volume, contact laboratory personnel to
quickly identify gas color and flammability, and make oil sampling for chromatographic analysis:
Gas characteristics Nature of failure

Yellow, not inflammable. Wood failure
Faint yellow, with strong odor, combustible Failure of paper or paperboard
Gray or black, flammable Oil flashover or failure
Colorless, tasteless, non-combustible Air separated from oil
c. Strengthen the monitoring of the transformer (voltage, current, temperature and sound
changes, etc.), and report to the leader. At this time, the heavy gas protection does not allow
switching signal, to ensure that the transformer internal fault can be quickly removed;
d. If the gas in the gas relay is colorless, tasteless and nonflammable, and the gas
chromatographic analysis judges it as air, the transformer can continue to operate.
74
e. If the gas relay acts due to the air inhalation from the oil circulation system, the failure
cooler should be stopped immediately and the maintenance team should be notified to deal with it;
if the gas relay acts due to the overflow of the remaining air in the oil and the signal interval is
shortened successively, which may cause tripping, the heavy gas should be switched to the signal
and report should be made to the leader of the project department and the owner. At the same time,
identify the causes and eliminate them.
f. If the gas of the gas relay is flammable, the chromatographic analysis shows that there are
faults in the transformer, contact the shift supervisor to shut down the transformer and carry out
inspection and handle it.
g. If the gas protection action is caused by the decrease of temperature or the decrease of oil
level due to oil leakage, the electrical maintenance team should be notified to deal with it.
6) Handling for action tripping of heavy gas of transformer
a. Conduct an overall external inspection of transformer:
b. Check whether the oil level of the oil gauge is normal.
C. Check whether oil temperature of transformer is normal.
d. Check whether there is oil crackle or abnormal noise inside the transformer.
e. Check whether the pressure relief device, respirator and bushing have breakage and blowout.
f. Check whether there is gas in the gas relay, if yes, collect gas for quick identification.
g. The inspection result shows that failure occurs inside transformer, the transformer should be
powered off for maintenance.
h. The cause to eliminate the malfunction must be found out and the test must be passed after
the transformer gas protection action is tripping and then it can be put into operation.
7) Treatment principle of transformer protection action tripping:
a. During transformer tripping, report to the shift supervisor immediately;
b. During transformer tripping, check the protection action immediately.
c. If the transformer tripping is the over-current protection action, it is confirmed to be caused
by the external malfunction after inspection, the transformer can be put into operation again after
reporting to the shift supervisor with eliminating failure points.
d. If the transformer tripping is caused by the fault of protection device, secondary circuit or
human error, the transformer can be put into operation without inspection, but the fault of protection
or secondary circuit shall be dealt with in time, and the re-gas and differential (quick tripping)
protection shall not be stopped at the same time.
e. The transformer tripping is differential (quick tripping) or zero sequence protection action
tripping. External inspection shall be carried out for the equipment within the protection range.
75
After the malfunction is found and eliminated, the transformer can be put into operation or blackout
inspection shall be carried out.
f. If the transformer is tripping and it is beyond the level, the external inspection of
transformer shall be made to be normal after the malfunction is removed, then the transformer can
be restored for power transmission of the transformer.
g. Transformer ignition:
Cause: The internal malfunction of transformer.
Treatment: Check whether the standby power is interconnected; Report to the shift supervisor,
and start fire pump; Disconnect all side power supplies of the transformer, shut down the cooler,
take fire fighting measures quickly to prevent the spread of fire, and notify the fire department; In
the case of oil transformer, discharge the transformer oil to the oil pool of accident immediately;
Start transformer fire protection system; Isolate the adjacent equipment according to the fire.
h. Complete shutdown of transformer cooler:
① Record the down time of cooler accurately.
② Reduce the transformer load to the specified value in time and monitor the
transformer oil temperature not to exceed the specified value.
③ Find out the cause quickly and restore the cooling device as soon as possible. When
the remote control fails, it shall be started in place, but shall not be treated by direct jacking
contactor.
④ If the power supply fails to be restored and the top oil temperature of the transformer
has reached the protective value or the duration of the total shutdown of the cooler has reached the
specified value, the transformer shall be stopped.
⑤ For the main transformer of forced oil circulation air cooling, the cooler can run for
20min under rated load with total power failure. After 20min, start tripping according to the top oil
temperature value, but the maximum running time is not more than 1 hour.
76
7 Operation Procedures of Power Distribution Equipment

7.1 Overview
7.1.1.1 The main enclosed busbar of the generator adopts the enclosure-continuous self-cooling
isolated-phase enclosed busbar.
7.1.1.2 The generator's main enclosed busbar is equipped with a slight pressure device system to
prevent the equipment inside the busbar from condensation and ensure the equipment insulation is
good. 7.1.1.3 The excitation AC non-segregated busbar is the area between the low voltage side of
excitation transformer and the excitation rectifier cabinet.
7.1.1.4 The slight pressure device is used to inject the air which is dehydrated and dried by the
molecular sieve dryer through the fan into the enclosed busbar, and keep the inner part of the busbar
in the state of slight pressure device to prevent the external air from entering, so that the air in the
busbar is always kept dry to prevent the occurrence of condensation.
7.1.2 Operation, Inspection and Maintenance of Enclosed Busbar
7.1.2.1 In normal operation, enclosed busbar pressure, temperature, humidity and other parameters
shall be noted to be normal.
7.1.2.2 The pressure inside the enclosed busbar is basically consistent with the atmospheric pressure.
The pressure is maintained automatically between 300~2500Pa (30.6~255mm water column).
7.1.2.3 The enclosure and frame of enclosed busbar temperature shall be less than 70 °C. The
conductor temperature is lower than 90°C. The temperature of the place such as bolt connection
joint shall be less than 105 °C.
7.1.2.4 The minimum requirement for the dew point temperature inside the shell is lower than the
ambient temperature to prevent condensation. When the drying device is running, the dew point
inside the shell shall be less than -25 °C.
7.1.2.5 In normal operation, the enclosed busbar slight pressure device adopts automatic control,
which can be input or exit automatically according to the air pressure in the enclosure.
7.1.2.6 The slight pressure device is put into the manual control mode before the generator enclosed
busbar is put into operation, or when continuous drying is required in special mode.
7.1.2.7 The grounding of the enclosed busbar closure is multi-point grounding mode, and the
connection of the grounding conductor shall be checked during operation without overheating and
other phenomena.
7.1.2.8 A detachable and retractable device for a movable sleeve with a seal cover is used at the
connection between the enclosed busbar and the equipment. Checked for seal damage, heat, and
other phenomena during the operation.
7.1.2.9 Set the drain valve at the appropriate position of the lowest point of the enclosed busbar
(such as the main transformer and the flange of raised seat of the transformer used in the high-
voltage factory), and the condensed water in the closure shall be discharged regularly.
77
7.1.2.10 The voltage mutual inductor cabinet of generator, arrester cabinet and neutral cabinet are
sealed and dust-proof, which shall be closed and locked in normal operation.
7.1.2.11 The generator excitation non-segregated busbar is free of heating, deformation, dripping,
vibration and other undesirable phenomena.
7.1.3 Insulation Measurement of Enclosed Busbar
7.1.3.1 The main enclosed busbar of the generator outlet is insulated, which is measured with 2500
V megohmmeter, and demands that the generator shall be no less than 22 MΩ in the dry state
according to the generator.
7.1.3.2 Medium voltage enclosed busbar is insulated, which is measured with 2500 V
megohmmeter, and shall not be less than 6 MΩ.
7.1.3.3 When testing the insulation, the enclosed busbar shall disassemble the connection between
the neutral grounding resistance box of the corresponding windings of the transformer and the
grounding point. When there is PT hanging on the enclosed busbar, the neutral grounding point of
PT high-voltage winding shall be opened before the insulation test, or the method of pulling out PT
trolley shall be adopted.
7.2 Power Cable
7.2.1 General Requirements of Cable Operation
7.2.1.1 The normal working voltage of the cable line shall not exceed 115% of the rated cable
voltage.
7.2.1.2 The cable is not allowed to overload in principle, and the normal current shall be restored
quickly even if the overload occurs during the accident handling.
7.2.1.3 The insulation resistance of cable shall be measured before put into operation. That below
1KV uses 1000V megohmmeter, and above 1KV uses 2500V megohmmeter to measure. The
resistance value shall be greater than 1MΩ/KV. The unbalanced coefficient of insulation resistance
of each phase under 3KV is no more than 2.5 MΩ, and the rest is no greater than 2 MΩ.
7.2.2 Inspection during the Cable Operation
7.2.2.1 The cable trench cover is covered completely, and there shall be no water, oil and other
debris in the cable trench.
7.2.2.2 Cable bracket shall be complete, with no rust collapse and no stacked debris on the cable
line.
7.2.2.3 There is no damage to the outer layer of the cable, and no compression or crack in the end
sheath.
7.2.2.4 The connection between cable and cable or between cable and distribution device is free
from overheating, discoloration and burnt smell. 7.2.2.5 The grounding wire of the cable is intact,
and the shield layer is intact without damage.
78
7.2.2.6 Cable head is free of oil exudation.

7.2.2.7 There is no heat source near the cable and avoid direct sunlight. The temperature of cable
shall not exceed the allowable value, and no overheat discharge occurs. 7.2.2.8 There shall be no
abnormal measures such as cable fire prevention, anti-corrosion and anti-mechanical damage
prevention.
7.3 Arrester
7.3.1 General Provisions of Arrester Operation
7.3.1.1 The arrester that prevents lightning overvoltage shall be put into operation during the
thunderstorm, and the arrester that prevents overvoltage shall be put into operation for a long time.
The withdrawal of the arrester must be approved by the project leader.
7.3.1.2 When the arrester produces smoke, bush rupture, serious discharge, it shall be disconnected
from the power supply by the remote before the isolation check.
7.3.1.3 For the electrical circuit where the arrester cannot be put into operation normally, the
recommission operation of equipment shall be performed under the commission of the project
department leader and the owner.
7.3.1.4 When in thunderstorm weather or the circuit has the operational tasks, the personnel shall
not approach the corresponding arrester.
7.3.2 Inspection in Operation
7.3.2.1 There is no loose or falling of the lead of the arrester, and the grounding wire is well
grounded.
7.3.2.2 The surface of porcelain bottle and bush shall be complete, clean, free of crack, breakage
and discharge.
7.3.2.3 The grading ring is not loose, rust, skew phenomenon.
7.3.2.4 After each thunderstorm or system grounding fault, the arrester shall be inspected in detail.
If the discharge counter indicates an increase in the number of operations, it shall be recorded and
check whether the leakage current is normal. Do not touch the terminal on the leakage ammeter.
7.3.2.5 The outdoor arrester shall not be inspected during thunderstorm.
7.4 Voltage Mutual Inductor and Current Mutual Inductor
7.4.1 General Requirements of Operation
7.4.1.1 The secondary side of the voltage mutual inductor in operation shall not be short-circuited.
The voltage mutual inductor is allowed to operate continuously without exceeding 115% of the
rated voltage.
7.4.1.2 The secondary side of the current transformer in operation shall not be opened. Current
mutual inductor is allowed to operate continuously without exceeding 110% of the rated current.
79
7.4.1.3 Each secondary winding of the mutual inductor must have a reliable protection grounding
and only one grounding point is allowed.
7.4.2 Insulation Measurement
7.4.2.1 The secondary side shall be measured with 500V megohmmeter under the condition of
proper safety measures (including the disconnection or short connection of secondary lines), and the
resistance shall be greater than 1 megohm.
7.4.2.2 7.4.3 Inspection and Maintenance in Normal Operation
7.4.3.1 The bush is clean, complete, with no crack and discharge phenomenon, and with no oil
leakage.
7.4.3.2 No overheating, and burnt smell of each connector.
7.4.3.3 The primary connection is complete, and all grounding wires are intact.
7.4.3.4 No abnormal sound or vibration.
7.4.3.5 The oil level and color of the oil-filled mutual inductor are normal.
7.5 6KV Switch
7.5.1 Overview
7.5.1.1 The 6KV switch cabinet used in the plant uses the VEZ metal armored medium-type
vacuum switch cabinet manufactured by Shanghai Radio & Television Electric (group) Co., LTD..
7.5.1.2 Motors with a capacity of less than 1000KW and transformers with a capacity of less than
1000KVA adopt vacuum contactor. The model is GEVCR193-12kV, rated current is 3.2KA, and 4S
short-time withstand current is 4KA.
7.5.1.3 Motors with a capacity of more than 1000 KW and transformers with a capacity of more
than 1000 KVA use vacuum circuit breakers, model GE VB2-12, with an open-off current of 40 KA
and 4S thermal stable current of 40 KA.
7.5.2 Equipment Specification
7.5.2.1 Parameters of 6KV switch cabinet are as follows:
6KV switch parameters
Project name Value

Switch cabinet System rated voltage (KV) 6
Highest working voltage (KV) 7.2
Rated short-time withstand current (KA) 40/4s
Rated Peak Withstand Current (KA) 100
1 min power-frequency withstand voltage insulation 42
level (KV)
Insulation level of lightning impact voltage (full wave) 75
(KV)
Project name Value
80
2500A (in standby section);

Rated Current (A) 1600A(the incoming line in the
working section; 1250A (feed line)
Circuit breaker
4s rated short-time tolerant current (KA) 40
Rated peak tolerant current and off current (KA) 100
Rated Current (A) 400(max)
F-C circuit 4s rated short-time tolerant current (KA) 4
Rated peak tolerant current and off current (KA) 40
7.5.3 The Misoperation-Preventive Locking of 6KV Switch Cabinet

7.5.3.1 The Misoperation-Preventive Locking of Contactor Switch Cabinet
1) When the vacuum contactor is in the closing position, it cannot be moved inside the cabinet.
2) The contactor can only be closed when the handcart is in test or working position.
3) When the handcart is in the working position, the grounding disconnector cannot be closed.
4) When the grounding disconnector is closed, the handcart cannot enter the cabinet.
5) After the handcar is out of the test position, the grounding metal separator will fall
automatically to prevent it from entering the live interval.
7.5.3.2 The misoperation-preventive locking of circuit breaker switch cabinet
1) The breaker can not be closed until the handcart is fully locked in the test or working
position.
2) When the circuit breaker is closed, the handcart cannot move inside the cabinet.
3) When the handcart moves between the positions of "work" and "test/disconnection" or
enters or leaves the cabinet.
4) It can prevent the circuit breaker with different capacity from being pushed into the cabinet.
5) When both the breaker and the grounding switch are in the disengaging position, the
handcart can move from the test/isolation position to the working position.
6) When the handcart is in the test or working position without controlling voltage, the circuit
breaker cannot be closed and can only be opened manually.
7) When the handcart is in the working position, the grounding disconnector cannot be closed.
When the grounding disconnector is closed, the handcart cannot enter the cabinet.
8) The rear cover of cable chamber can be opened only after the grounding switch is closed;
When the cable chamber cover is opened, the grounding switch cannot be separated.
7.5.4 6KV Switch Inspection and Maintenance
7.5.4.1 Check of the Equipment before Operation
1) Check that all work tickets are returned at the end of the work, remove all temporary safety
measures, and restore the permanent block and sign.
81
2) The insulation resistance of the operation system equipment shall be measured in

accordance with the following requirements: For the equipment of 6KV voltage level, the insulation
resistance shall be greater than 6 megohm (dry variable insulation shall be greater than 12 megohm)
and the absorption ratio shall be greater than 1.3 by using a 2500V megger.
3) All parts of the system are clean without obvious grounding or short circuit.
4) The contact of each switch and disconnector is in good condition, with no loose and fallen
down.
5) Good grounding of switchboard and distribution cabinet. The operating mechanism of the
switch equipment is intact.
6) The input position of each protection automatic equipment is correct.
7.5.4.2 Inspection in Operation
1) Each part of switch cabinet in operation is clean, with no discharge phenomenon and
flashover traces.
2) There is no overheating and abnormal smell in each part of switch cabinet.
3) The indicator of switch cabinet panel light and relay work normally.
4) There is no vibration and abnormal sound in each part of the switch cabinet.
5) Switch status indicates correct, and energy storage is normal.
6) Switch protection input is correct without dropping, and the remote switch position is
correct.
7) There is no water leakage and water seepage in the distribution room, no water on the
ground, and adequate indoor lighting.
8) The temperature, humidity in the distribution room is met the specification, with the
temperature≤40℃, and humidity≤80%.
9) The fire equipment is complete.
7.5.4.3 Inspection after tripping of switch accident
1) Check whether the switch opening is normal and the secondary circuit is normal.
2) Check the action of protection relay.
3) Check the switch cabinet for smoke, heat, discharge and burnt smell.
4) Check whether the switch mechanism is loose and whether the F-C switch fuse is broken.
5) Check the action of corresponding interconnected equipment.
7.5.4.4 In the following cases, the 6KV switch shall be tested at the test position
1) The switch is used for the first time.
2) Power transmission after fault processing of the switch.
82
3) The first power transmission after the switch is repaired.

7.6 Common Malfunction Cause and Treatment of 6KV Switch
7.6.1 Circuit Breaker Closing
7.6.1.1 Reason:
1) The closing electromagnet burns out
2) The secondary line of closing electromagnet falls off
3) The contact of auxiliary switch is poor
4) The locking electromagnet is burnt out
5) The switch is not in test position and working position
6) The secondary wiring of the locking electromagnet is fallen off
7) The contact of secondary plug-in pin is poor
8) The closing voltage is too low
9) The secondary conductor joint is loose
10) The closing link is damaged, or the plug makes the closing not in place
11) The opening pawl cannot maintain the closing position of the circuit breaker
12) The overtravel is too long
13) The screw of opening panel is loose or out of shape
14) The trolley is not in the working position, or the test position. Mechanical linkage
prevents closing.
7.6.1.2 Treatment:
1) Replace the closing electromagnet
2) Connect the secondary conductor
3) Check the auxiliary switch and replace it if there is a problem
4) Replace the locking electromagnet
5) Check if the S8 and S9 contact is through
6) Connect the secondary wiring
7) Check the processing of secondary pins of plug-in
8) Measure the closing voltage and restore voltage
9) Check the secondary conductor and replace it if there is a problem
10) Adjust or replace the closing link
11) Adjust and replace the opening mechanism
83
12) Adjust the overtravel to within the prescribed limit

13) Repair or replace the closing module
14) Check if the trolley is in place. If the parts are damaged, replace them in time
7.6.2 Circuit Breaker Opening
7.6.2.1 Causes
1) The opening electromagnet burns out
2) The secondary line of opening electromagnet falls off
3) The contact of auxiliary switch is poor
4) The opening voltage is too low
5) The secondary conductor joint is loose
6) The opening trip fails
7.6.2.2 Treatment
1) Replace the opening electromagnet
2) Connect the secondary conductor
3) Check the auxiliary switch and replace it if there is a problem
4) Measure the opening voltage and restore voltage
5) Check the secondary conductor and replace it if there is a problem
6) Adjust and replace the opening elements
7.6.3 Wrong Trolley Position of Circuit Breaker on Switch Cabinet
7.6.3.1 Causes
1) Travel switch S8, S9 are failure
2) The trolley is deformed
3) There is a problem with the control circuit
4) The trolley is not in place
5) The switch-over mechanism of the trolley is damaged
7.6.3.2 Treatment
1) Replace the auxiliary switch or check the trolley with the manufacturer
7.6.4 The automatic closing without operation, the closing indicator light is on and the current
indicator indicates that there is current
7.6.4.1 Causes
1) The grounding of two DC points leads to the grounding of closing control circuit;
84
2) The fault of an element causes the control circuit of switching to be switched on;
3) As the closing contactor coil resistance is too small and the action voltage is low, false
switching of circuit breaker may be caused by instant pulse of DC system;
4) Spring operation mechanism and energy-storage spring buckle are not reliable, so automatic
closing of circuit breaker may be caused by automatic release of shackle in the situation of shaking.
7.6.4.2 Treatment
1) In case of false switching of switches, open the circuit breaker immediately and report to the
shift supervisor. In case of false switching after the above operation, disconnect the switching
power source, open the switch and contact the shift supervisor and electrical maintenance
professional in the Project Department.
2) Check if DC system is grounded;
3) Replace the failed elements;
4) Replace the closing circuit;
5) Adjust mechanical structure to make it flexible and easy to use.
7.6.5 No short circuit or grounding phenomenon, no-action of relay protection, automatic trip of
circuit breaker, relevant indicator light up.
7.6.5.1 Causes
1) Mis-operation of personnel;
2) Vibration of mechanism due to external force, the protection panel vibrates due to external
force, causing automatic trip;
3) Other electrical or mechanical faults,
7.6.5.2 Treatment
Report to the shift supervisor for treatment after mis-tripping of switch is found. And the
following treatment shall be made: For "mis-tripping" arising from personnel mis-operation,
vibration of mechanism due to external force and automatic tripping of protection panel due to
vibration caused by external force, power shall be transmitted to feeder immediately. For other
electrical or mechanical faults, if the power transmission cannot be restored immediately, please
contact the shift supervisor and electrical maintenance professional to suspend the "false tripping"
circuit breaker for repair.
7.6.6 The car cannot swing from the test position to the working position
7.6.6.1 Causes
1) The small valve in front of the grounding disconnector cabinet does not bounce, (the reason
that the trolley can be shaken for one and a half rounds that is it cannot move)
2) The grounding disconnector is in the closing position
85
3) The circuit breaker is in the closing position, (the reason that the trolley can be shaken for
one and a half rounds that is it cannot move)
4) Adjust the trolley of circuit breaker and push mechanism with the valve mechanism stuck,
so that the valve cannot be opened flexibly (the reason why the car cannot be shaken when it is
about 15 circles)
5) The handle on both sides of the trolley is not in place (the reason why the trolley cannot
move when it rolls to half circle)
7.6.6.2 Treatment
1) Check the reason why the small valve of the grounding disconnector is not hoisted, and
handle it flexibly.
2) Separate the grounding disconnector
3) Disconnecting circuit breaker
4) Move the circuit breaker trolley to the transferring vehicle to check whether the pulling
mechanism on the circuit breaker trolley and valve mechanism touch each other. Adjust the pushing
mechanism and valve on the circuit breaker trolley to operate flexibly.
5) Make both sides of the trolley handle in place.
7.6.7 The grounding disconnector cannot be operated
7.6.7.1 Causes
1) The back door of the panel and cabinet is not tightly closed.
2) The operating mechanism is damaged.
7.6.7.2 Treatment
1) Tighten the back door of the panel and cabinet with screws.
2) Replace new operating mechanism.
86
7.7 380V Switch

7.7.1 Overview
7.7.1.1 Power switch, contact switch, feeder switch to MCC and other auxiliary workshop incoming
power switch adopt Tianshui Great Wall series drawer-type circuit breaker; The loading switch with
capacity over 100 KW adopts frame-type air circuit breaker of Tianshui Great Wall series. The
loading switch with capacity less than 100 KW adopts the plastic shell circuit breaker of Tianshui
Great Wall series.
7.7.1.2 In addition to the motor with its own control box, the motor with a capacity of less than
100KW is equipped with a switch and AC contactor of Schneider CL/CK series.
7.7.2 The equipment specifications of 380V switch cabinet are as following table:
Type Drawer Frame

Rated voltage (V) 380/220V 380V
Rated insulation voltage (V) 1000V 1000V
Rated short-time tolerant current (KA), 2s ≤50KA ≤50KA
Rated Peak Withstand Current (KA) ≤125KA ≤125KA
Rated frequency (HZ) 50 50
AC withstand voltage (KV) Power frequency 2.5KVlmin, impact Power frequency 2.5KVlmin, impact
8KV 8KV
Power distribution system Three-phase five-wire mechanism Three-phase five-wire mechanism
Rated voltage of auxiliary circuit (V) 220V DC，220V AC 220V DC，220V AC
Protection class of enclosure ≤IP42 ≤IP42
Frame circuit breaker MPA series MPA series
Primary Plastic enclosure circuit FDN/FGN series FDN/FGN series
Components breaker
Contactor CL/CK series CL/CK series
7.7.3 Operation and Shutdown

7.7.3.1 Inspection before the equipment operation
Check that all work tickets are returned at the end of the work, remove all temporary safety
measures, and restore the permanent block and sign. The insulation resistance of the operation
system equipment shall be measured in accordance with the following requirements: For the
equipment of 380V voltage level, the insulation resistance shall be greater than 0.5 megohm by
using a 2500V megger.
All parts of the system are clean without obvious grounding or short circuit.
The contact of each switch and disconnector is in good condition, with no loose and fallen down.
Good grounding of switchboard and distribution cabinet.
The operating mechanism of the switch equipment is intact and the transmission test is in good
state.
87
The input position of each protection is correct.

7.7.3.2 380V PC switch is switched to hot standby by maintenance
1) Work tickets for checking the system have ended, temporary safety measures have been
removed, and permanent safety measures have been restored.
2) Check that all parts of the system are in good condition, no sundries interferes with power
transmission, which meets the operation conditions.
3) Check that the switch is in isolation.
4) Verify that the three phases on the load side of the switch have no voltage.
5) The insulation measurement of shaking motor is qualified.
6) Check the switch of switch control mode in "in place" position.
7) Check that the switch is in the opening position.
8) Swing the switch to work position.
9) Close the switch to control the power small valve.
10) Check that the protection input is normal, switch energy storage is good, and the
indicator of the opening is green.
11) Switch the switch control to the "remote" position.
12) Remove the "forbidden operation" of switch control on the DCS operation interface.
7.7.3.3 380V PC switch is switched to maintenance from hot standby
1) Check that the motor is out of service and the power switch is in the opening position.
2) Switch control mode of switch to "in place" position.
3) Swing the switch to the isolation position.
4) Disconnect the switch to control the small valve.
5) On the DCS operation interface, switch the switch control to "forbidden operation".
7.7.4 Operation Monitoring and Maintenance of 380V Switch
7.7.4.1 Inspection in Operation of 380V Switch
1) Each part of switch cabinet in operation is clean, with no discharge phenomenon and
flashover traces.
2) There is no overheating in each part of switch cabinet.
3) The switch status indicator is correct.
4) There is no vibration and abnormal sound in each part of the switch cabinet.
5) There is no water leakage and water seepage in the distribution room, no water on the
ground, and adequate indoor lighting.
88
6) The temperature, humidity in the distribution room is met the specification, with the
temperature≤40℃, and humidity≤80%.
7) The fire equipment is complete.
7.7.4.2 380V switch inspection requirements
1) Check that the temperature of switch cabinet enclosure is normal and there is no abnormal
discharge or burnt smells.
2) Check that the auxiliary power of the switch is normal and the indicator light is normal.
3) Check that the protection device of switch cabinet is input correctly.
4) Check that the remote communication function is normal, and the operation of intelligent
control device is normal.
5) Check the secondary connection terminals to be free of loose, ash, the damp and the burnt.
6) Check the incoming cable head without overheating.
7.7.4.3 380V switch operation relevant regulations
1) The switch opening/closing operation is carried out in the "remote" (control room or local
control box) in principle, and the local operation is only used for the test of the switch in the test
position generally.
2) When the switch is stopping power transmission, the switch shall be removed in or out the
space of switch cabinet, which requires that the switch must be disconnected state.
3) In the process of switching in and out of the cabinet for power cut and power transmission
of switch requires the control power supply to be transmitted power normally, and the switch of
"local/remote" must be in the "local" position.
4) For the switch with the spare automatic switching function, the automatic switching function
shall be removed before operating the power off.
5) Note the locking relationship between the operated switch and the high voltage side of the
transformer, the lower MCC side and the interlock mutual auxiliary machine switch.
7.8 Treatment of Distribution Device Abnormality and Accident
7.8.1 Treatment of Cable Ignition
7.8.1.1 Disconnect the power supply immediately and notify the firefighters.
7.8.1.2 Automatic fire extinguishers shall be operated. Use carbon tetrachloride fire extinguishers,
carbon dioxide fire extinguishers or sand and asbestos in the absence of automatic fire extinguishers.
The foam fire extinguishers or water is prohibited.
7.8.1.3 Fire fighters in cable trench or indoors must wear gas masks, insulated gloves and insulated
shoes.
89
7.8.1.4 Try to isolate the source of fire to prevent the fire from spreading to normal operating
equipment and expand the accident.
7.8.1.5 Firefighters are prohibited from touching ungrounded metal, and are prohibited from
touching cable brackets or moving cables.
7.8.2 Mutual Inductor Abnormal of Current and Voltage and Fault Treatment
7.8.2.1 In case of any of the following circumstances, the mutual inductor shall be isolated and
discontinued immediately:
1) Loud discharging sound and abnormal sound occur inside.
2) The smokes and burnt smells.
3) There is spark between the coil and the casing or lead and the casing. The joint is loose and
hot, and cannot run normally.
4) The high voltage fuse of the voltage mutual inductor will fuse again after being replaced.
7.8.2.2 The fuse of voltage mutual inductor is blown out or the secondary circuit is broken
1) Generally there are abnormal voltage and power indication, watt-hour meter stalling or slow
turning.
2) Identify the voltage mutual inductor with fault, monitor the operation with ammeter, and
check the secondary circuit of voltage mutual inductor with fault.
3) With the permission of the shift supervisor, stop the relay protection and automatic devices
related to the voltage mutual inductor with fault.
4) If the electric quantity is affected, the fault starting time, recovery time, watt-hour meter
reading and load shall be recorded and estimated afterwards.
5) The adjustment operations of load and voltage shall not be performed with the meter of fault
circuit.
6) When the fuse of voltage mutual inductor needs to be replaced, necessary safety measures
shall be taken in advance, such as wearing insulating gloves, safety goggles and insulating pads.
7.8.2.3 The secondary circuit of the current mutual inductor is open
1) In general, the indication of ammeter, power meter and watt-hour meter are abnormal. In
serious cases, there are phenomena such as buzzing or discharging sound, coke stink and smoke,
etc., and corresponding protection devices have signals such as CT open circuit.
2)With the permission of the shift supervisor, stop the related protection and automatic devices.
3) Make safety measures to prevent damage to equipment and personal safety.
4) Try to reduce the primary side current for processing and disconnect the primary circuit
when necessary.
90
5) If the electric quantity is affected, the fault starting time, recovery time, watt-hour meter
reading and load shall be recorded and estimated afterwards.
91
8 Operation Procedures of Plant Motor

8.1 Technical Specification of Motor
8.1.1 Technical Specification of 6KV motor:
Rated power Rated current Rated speed

Motor name Model Qty.
(KW) (A) (rpm)
Primary air fan A/B 1000 111.2 1489 YKK500-4TH 4
Air feeder A/B 315 37.7 991 YKK400-6TH 4
Draught fan A/B 900 103.4 994 YKK560-6TH 4
Coal pulverizer A/B/C/D 335 42 988 YMKQ450-6 8
Circuit water pump A/B 800 99.7 495 YLBT630 4
Condensate water pump A/B 355 43 1482 YKKL4CD-4TH 4
Motor feed water pump 3800 408 1500 YSKS630-4TH 4
8.1.2 Technical Specification of 400V motor:
Rated power Rated current Rated speed

S/N Motor name Model Qty.
(KW) (A) (rpm)
1 Vacuum pump 55 111.2 740 XDM2-315S 4
Low-pressure heater
2 75 137 2970 YK3 280S-2WF 1TH 4
drain pump
Closed cooling water
3 185 332 1490 YX3 355S1-4 4
pump
Seawater boosting
4 75 143 992 YX3 315S-6 4
pump
Main motor of
5 7.5 16.7 970 HM2-160M-6B5 2
preheater
High pressure water
6 75 139 1485 YE2-280S-4 2
pump of air preheaters
7 DC oil pump motor 22 144.2 2950 ZDB-62THF1L3 2
8 Coal feeder 2.2 4.9 1410 Y2,2-4P 8
9 Cleaning chain motor 0.37 1.08 1340 GD71M2-4 8
Raw coal hopper
10 3 6.8 1420 Y100L2-4 8
pickfront
Regular pit drainage
11 7.5 14.5 2930 1TL0001-1CA1 2
pump
12 Seal air fan 90 164 1450 90KW-4P 2
13 Domestic water pump 11 21.3 2935 YX3160M1-2WM-2 1
Condensate water
14 7.5 14.5 2883 YX3 132S2 2WF1TH 1
supply pump
15 Rotating screen motor 3.0 8.99 720 M20A132M2-4
Wash water pump of
16 18 22 41.1 YX3 180M-2WF2THS 2
the rotating screen
Smoke extractor
exhaust fan of the
17 3.0 6.2 2875 YBX3-1001-2V1T 2
steam turbine main oil
tank
92
Circuit cooling water

18 7.5 14.7 2883 YG 132S2 WF2 JHS 1
pump
Lubrication pump of
19 3 9 720/1450 HD2-132M-8/4 8
coal pulverizer
The control oil station
20 pump of coal 7.5 15 1460 YZ-132M-4V1--HT 8
pulverizer
21 Jacking oil pump 55 103.5 1480 YB3-259H-4TH 2
Feedwater pump of the
22 45 82.7 2965 YX3 225M-2WF1TH 1
boiler
23 SCAF 15 27.0 2938 M2BAX 160MLB 2 2
Equipment
24 (miscellaneous) with air 90 190.9/174 1485 IY2E-280M-4 4
compressor
Gasification air fan of
25 15 29.6 1460 RYJ160L-4 4
hopper
26 Motor driven fire pump 132 236 2975 YX3-315M-2 1
27 Fire resistant oil pump 30 56.3 1470 HE2-200L-4 4
28 AC lubricant oil pump 30 56.3 2963 TB3-200L1-2THF1 2
29 C-12 strip conveyor 45 84.4 1475 YE3-225M-4TH 2
30 Fuel oil supply pump 37 67.5 2960 YB3-200L2-2 2
8.2 General Requirements for Motor Operation

8.2.1 The personnel on duty of the mechanical equipment driven by each jurisdiction motor shall
master the power supply mode of the motor. The operation personnel on duty shall master not only
the power supply mode of the motor, but also the operation mode of its relay protection and
automatic device.
8.2.2 The newly installed or overhauled motor must pass the trial run without load (the trial run
time of the low-voltage motor shall not be less than 2 hours, and the trial run time of the high-
voltage motor shall not be less than 4 hours); The correct direction of rotation is necessary to drive
the mechanical equipment.
8.2.3 Each motor shall have the manufacturer's nameplate on its enclosure. If the nameplate is
lost, or the motor cannot refer to the original rated nameplate when running after maintenance, the
new nameplate shall be made up according to the test results.
8.2.4 All motors shall have corresponding relay protection or automatic device, and no
unprotected motor is allowed to be put into operation.
8.2.5 The motor enclosure, ventilation ducts and metal structures shall be painted, named and
coded according to the unit to which they belong.
8.2.6 The strengthened block or cover shall be installed on the outgoing line and cable head as
well as the exposed rotating part of the motor.
8.2.7 Keep the motor around clean and dry to prevent the invasion of water, steam and oil. In
particular, there shall be no obstruction and dust accumulation near the air vent.
93
8.2.8 The leading wire of AC motor winding shall be marked with its phase, and its polarity shall
be marked with DC motor. The steering of the motor must be in accordance with the mechanical
requirements and marked clearly.
8.2.9 The rated current value of the melt shall be indicated on the enclosure of each type of fuse
used to protect the motor.
8.2.10 Explosion-proof motor shall be used in places where there is danger of explosion and fire.
8.2.11 The enclosure of the motor and the starter shall be grounded in accordance with the
provisions of the Technical Regulations for Grounding. It is forbidden to work on the motor
grounding body in operation.
8.2.12 The standby motor shall be able to start at any time, and make regular rotation of the motor
or regular operation test periodic table. Duty personnel shall execute the motor to operate in
periodic rotation strictly or put it into trial operation regularly.
8.2.13 The motor that can be switched to start in normal condition according to switching cycle.
The motor that has no conditions to start and its capacity is 50 KW and above and rotate for 7
consecutive days shall measure insulation resistance, otherwise the insulation must be measured
before starting (the motor with dampproof heater can no longer measure insulation resistance at
ordinary times if the heater is put in operation normally. But the insulation must be measured after
the maintenance in motor or cables). In order to prevent the insulation dampness of the standby
motor, the motor with obvious dampness at the installation site shall be put into operation and tested
every week.
8.2.14 The strongly lubricated motor of the bearing shall be provided with the signal device of oil
interruption, and the interlock device of the motor shall be installed if necessary when the oil is
interrupted and oil pressure is low.
8.2.15 If the remote control switch normally used to pull the motor is far away from the motor, the
accident button shall be installed near the motor, and when the accident button is used to pull the
motor power switch, the operating circuit shall be locked. The accident button shall have an obvious
name number and warning sign, as well as a facility to prevent being touched or pulled by others.
The emergency button can only be used in an emergency and is prohibited strictly to be used as a
condition of safety measures.
8.2.16 Motors with capacity of 40 KW or above or machines driven by them shall be adjusted
according to the current in the production process. Ammeter shall be installed in the place where the
motor is operated to monitor its starting and running.
8.2.17 The motor that is installed in the room with particularly much dust shall clean regularly, not
have water to fall on motor. For the motor that adopts air cooler, the cooler shall not condense water
bead, and cold wind chamber shall not have accumulation water.
94
8.2.18 The mechanical personnel on duty driven by the motor shall record the starting and stopping
time of the motor and all abnormal conditions in the operation of the motor in detail to the on-duty
record book.
8.2.19 Each type of fusible equipment used for the motor (protector, fuse link, fuse, etc.) shall be
checked for its integrity before use, and note that the rated current shall be matched with the
capacity of the motor.
8.3 Operation Mode of Motor
8.3.1 Under the cooling air temperature, the motor can run as specified data on the manufacturer's
nameplate.
8.3.2 The maximum monitoring temperature of motor coil and iron core shall not exceed this
temperature in any case according to the manufacturer's regulations. Without the motor that is
regulated by manufacturer, the highest temperature of the coil and iron core shall not exceed 105 ℃,
and the temperature rise shall not exceed 65℃.
8.3.3 The motor can be in operation in the range of rated voltage fluctuation-5%~+10%, and its
rated voltage output doesn't change (5.7~6.6KV, 360~420V). The unbalance value of the voltage
between phases shall not exceed 5% in rated output operation, and attention shall be paid to the
heating and vibration of the motor during the unbalance operation.
8.3.4 The permissible range of motor power supply frequency is ±5% of rated frequency.
8.3.5 The voltage of the DC motor is allowed to change to ±10%. At this time, the motor can
function continuously and the temperature of the motor core and windings shall not exceed the limit
value.
95
8.3.6 The motor current shall not exceed +5% of the rated value in normal operation. If it exceeds
+5% to +10%, the on-duty staff of the unit shall not be able to reduce to the rated current within 15
minutes. The restriction is not applicable due to overloading of the main engine. 8.3.7 When the
motor is running, the vibration value of each bearing shall not exceed the following values:
Rated speed rpm 3000 1500 1000 750 and below

Vibration value (double 0.05 0.085 0.10 0.12
amplitude) mm
The movement of sliding bearing shall not exceed 0.02- 0.04mm. No movement of rolling
bearing is allowed.
8.3.8 The maximum allowable temperature of the motor winding insulation material is as shown
in the following table. Under normal operation, the motor shall not exceed this temperature.
Insulation grade A E B F H
Maximum allowable
60 75 80 100 125
temperature rise (℃)
Maximum temperature (℃) 105 120 130 155 180
Ambient temperature (℃) 40 40 40 40 40
8.3.9 The temperature of motor bearing shall be in accordance with the following standards
(provided by the manufacturer):
8.3.9.1 Sliding Bearing: It shall not exceed 80 ℃ (temperature rise 40 ℃).
8.3.9.2 Rolling Bearings: It must not exceed 100 ℃ (temperature rise 60 ℃).
8.4 Monitoring of Motor Coil Insulation
8.4.1 The insulation resistance value of the motor shall be measured under the following
circumstances and the measured data shall be recorded in the insulation record of the motor.
8.4.1.1 The new input motor.
8.4.1.2 The motor powered for the first time after maintenance.
8.4.1.3 The motor filled with water and affected with damp.
8.4.1.4 When the motor that has been powered off for more than a week needs to be transmitted
power.
8.4.1.5 Motor that Trips in Operation
8.4.2 Notes for motor insulation measurement:
8.4.2.1 The correct number of the equipment shall be checked before measuring insulation.
8.4.2.2 Check all the power supply of the motor has been disconnected, make sure there is no
possibility of a sudden call, and make sure there is no voltage with qualified electroscope.
8.4.2.3 Discharge the tested motor and cable.
96
8.4.2.4 Select the appropriate meter and check that the meter is in good condition and the circuit is
under unattended operation.
8.4.2.5 Select the grounding point, and verify that the grounding point is indeed good. Disconnect
the circuit that affects the accuracy of measurement.
8.4.2.6 The time for measuring insulation shall not be less than 1 minute.
8.4.2.7 After the measurement, discharge the measured equipment sufficiently, and recover the
circuit which affects the accuracy of measurement.
8.5 Rules for measuring insulation of motors
8.5.1 The 6kV AC motor is measured with 2500V megger with insulation resistance RM≥7MΩ
and absorption ratio≥1.3. The insulation resistance after maintenance shall be no lower than 80%
before maintenance.
8.5.2 AC 380V motor, cable measured with 500V megger, and its insulation resistance
RM≥0.5MΩ.
8.5.3 DC 220V motor, low voltage cable, secondary circuit measured with 500V megger, and the
insulation resistance RM≥0.5MΩ
8.5.4 The resistance between the phase of AC motor (Y or △ wire) and between the positive and
negative polar of DC motor shall be zero.
8.5.5 If the measured motor's insulation resistance value and absorption ratio are lower than the
specified value or between phases (between poles) are not available, the motor shall not be powered
or started. After confirming the measurement result is correct, inform the maintenance personnel to
check and deal with the motor.
8.5.6 The measurement of motor insulation resistance must be carried out in the state of circuit
cold standby.
8.5.7 Measure the insulation resistance under special circumstances (such as the motor is affected
with damp).
8.5.8 When measuring insulation resistance, the voltage grade of megameter shall be adopted as
follows:
8.5.8.1 500V and the lower electrical equipment or circuit adopts 500V megohmmeter.
8.5.8.2 500V and the higher electrical equipment or circuit adopts 500V megohmmeter.
8.6 Check the motor before starting
8.6.1 Check the following before starting the motor:
8.6.1.1 Before the motor is sent for power transmission after new installation or maintenance, it
shall be checked that all relevant work tickets have been finished or retrieved, all safety measures
shall be removed, no one is working on the machinery driven, the electrical connection is qualified
and the insulation is qualified.
97
8.6.1.2 Motor and its around shall be clean, free of sundries (especially flammable and explosive
substances) and unmanned work.
8.6.1.3 The motor cooler with water cooling is put into normal operation.
8.6.1.4 Bearing cooling system is input normal, and the oil level is normal.
8.6.1.5 The protection cover of the rotating part or the live part of the motor is installed firmly, and
the grounding wire of the enclosure is intact. All the bolts and fasteners are fixed firmly, and the
foundation is firm.
8.6.1.6 The mechanical equipment of the motor is intact, the oil level of the bearing and the starter
is normal, the oil type complies with the manufacturer's regulations, and the bearing cooling device
is intact and put into operation.
8.6.1.7 The water system of the air cooler of the closed motor shall be put into operation.
8.6.1.8 The protection device of motor and auxiliary device are put into operation.
8.6.1.9 For DC motors, the commutator surface shall be checked and the carbon brushes shall be in
close contact.
8.6.1.10 Try to rotate the motor rotor to prove that the rotor rotates flexibly which is free from
friction with the stator. The machinery is free of friction.
8.6.2 The maintenance personnel shall be responsible for the inspection, command and
coordination of the motor after maintenance, and the operation personnel shall be responsible for
the operation. The application form for trial rotation shall be submitted before power transmission.
The following points shall be checked during the trial rotation:
8.6.2.1 The rotation direction is correct.
8.6.2.2 Motor and bearing do not give out abnormal noise and vibration, no abnormal smell.
8.6.2.3 The no-load and load current of the motor shall not exceed 10% of the rated value during
normal operation, and the starting time shall not exceed the normal time.
8.6.2.4 Motor wiring is correct and signals are normal.
8.6.2.5 The temperature rise of motor and bearing shall not exceed the allowable value.
8.6.2.6 When the trial running of motor is qualified, it can be turned into standby or operational
after the maintenance staff shall make it clear.
8.7 Regulations for Motor Start and Stop
8.7.1 External inspection shall be carried out before starting the motor with remote closing. After
the relevant protection has been put in, the operator shall be informed that the motor is ready to start.
8.7.2 When the motor starts, the starting process shall be monitored. If it is an emergency start for
self-start or accident treatment, it shall be checked after starting. After starting, the current of the
motor shall be checked if it exceeds the rated value. In case of doubt, the motor itself shall be
reviewed.
98
8.7.3 When the motor is operated and closed after new installation or overhaul, the related
maintenance and operation personnel shall pay attention to observe whether there is any abnormal
situation during the start-up process, until the speed rises to the rated speed. If there is any abnormal
situation, the power shall be disconnected immediately to find out the reason.
8.7.4 In normal conditions, the motor shall not stop when the current does not return during the
motor start-up process.
8.7.5 When starting large-capacity motor and DC motor, the busbar and DC busbar voltage shall
be monitored and adjusted when necessary.
8.7.6 The 6kV squirrel cage rotor motor is allowed to start for two times continuously in the cold
state, and the third start is not allowed until at least 45 minutes after the interval. Start for once
continuously in the hot state, and the second start is not allowed until at least 20 minutes after the
interval. The total number of starting times of 6kV motor within 24 hours shall not exceed 6 times.
8.7.7 At startup, the motor is accelerated to the rated speed at 80% of the rated voltage.
8.7.8 After the first start of unprotected action is tripping, the motor, the mechanical part and the
electrical part shall be checked. After confirmation of good performance, a special person shall be
assigned to monitor, and the motor can be started for the second time. In case of abnormal start, the
motor shall be stopped immediately and inform the maintenance personnel to deal with it.
8.7.9 Generally, the starting current of the AC motor is about 6-8 times at the rated current. Start
time is about 5 seconds, and DC motor is about 2 times rated current.
8.7.10 Under normal conditions, the motor on the same 6kV busbar is not allowed to start 2 or
more motors at the same time (except for accident).
8.7.11 The three-phase AC motor is prohibited to start out of phase strictly.
8.8 The Motor in Operation Shall be Checked Regularly
8.8.1 Check whether the motor voltage and current conform to the specified value. In case of non-
conformity, effective measures shall be taken. When measures are ineffective, the shift supervisor
shall be reported to.
8.8.2 Check whether the lubricant oil temperature of bearing is normal. For the bearing of oil ring,
pay attention to whether oil ring rotation is flexible and the oil in the bearing box is full to the
correct position of oil level indicator. To prevent false oil level, it is necessary to check the normal
operation of the oil system of the strongly lubricated bearing.
8.8.3 Pay attention to that there is no abnormality in the running sound of the motor.
8.8.4 The slip-ring commutator of DC motor has no spark, carbon brush has no beat and it is in
good contact.
8.8.5 Keep the motor around clean (there shall be no coal ash, water pollution, oil pollution, metal
conductor, cotton waste).
8.8.6 Check the motor enclosure and bearing for abnormal temperature rise and vibration.
99
8.8.7 The motor that is introduced to air cooler by external pipes shall be kept clean and
unimpeded, and the cooling water system shall be checked by the large closed cooling motor.
8.8.8 All auxiliary devices (such as monitoring instruments and heaters of windings and bearings,
etc.) have good signal, indication and control device.
8.8.9 The motor's emergency button shall be intact.
8.8.10 The standby motor shall be in a good state of standby, and shall not be inspected or repaired
without the permission of the shift supervisor.
8.8.11 After the protection action of the low-voltage motor thermocouple, it can be started again
after the inspection without obvious problems. When the thermocouple protection is started again
within a short period of time, it cannot be started again before the cause is known and the fault is
not eliminated.
8.9 The Power Cut and Power Transmission Operation of Motor
8.9.1 Power Transmission Operation Steps of 6kV Motor
8.9.1.1 The inspection and repair work has been completed and the work ticket has been returned.
The grounding disconnector has been opened and locked (or the grounding wire has been removed).
8.9.1.2 Check the correct equipment number and name before electricity testing.
8.9.1.3 Measure the insulation resistance values of motor and cable are qualified and record the
insulation resistance values.
8.9.1.4 Check the mechanical part of the switch is good.
8.9.1.5 Check that the switch has been disconnected and the interlock is out.
8.9.1.6 Switch the "remote"/"local" switch to "local" position.
8.9.1.7 Send the switch to the "test" position.
8.9.1.8 To send the secondary plug on the switch.
8.9.1.9 Close the door of switch cabinet.
8.9.1.10 Operate power supply with the switch.
8.9.1.11 Check that the protection is input correctly and the protection device is good.
8.9.1.12 It is good to do the static switch jumping and closing test (to prevent RB from being
triggered during unit operation).
8.9.1.13 Disconnect the operating power from the switch.
8.9.1.14 Check that the switch is broken (the fuse of the contactor is intact).
8.9.1.15 Shake the switch to the "working" position and check if the switch is in place.
8.9.1.16 Operate power supply with the switch.
8.9.1.17 Check that the energy storage of switch is normal.
100
8.9.1.18 Switch the "remote"/"local" switch to the "remote" position.

8.9.2 Power Shutdown Operation Steps of 6kV Motor:
8.9.2.1 Check the name of equipment and protection in correct.
8.9.2.2 Exit the motor interlock.
8.9.2.3 Disconnect the power switch of the motor.
8.9.2.4 Check that the switch is off.
8.9.2.5 Switch the "remote"/"local" switch to "local" position.
8.9.2.6 Disconnect the operating power of the switch.
8.9.2.7 Swing the switch to the "test" position.
8.9.2.8 Disconnect the switch of the control power
8.9.2.9 Take safety measures as required.
8.10 Motor Abnormality and Accident Treatment
8.10.1 Abnormality and Treatment
8.10.1.1 When the switch is closed, the motor will not move but make noise or cannot reach
the normal speed.
1) Check the stator windings for no phase breakage or wiring errors (wrong delta connection
for star, and the one phase opposite connection for star connection, etc.).
2) Check the insurance for fuse break or poor contact.
3) Check whether the motor or the machinery being dragged is stuck.
4) In case of internal fault of motor, notify maintenance personnel to deal with it.
8.10.1.2 Motor fault protection device action is tripping during starting:
1) Check the motor once and the machinery being dragged has no fault signs.
2) Measure motor insulation when out of power, and check if there is grounding or wire
breakage.
3) Notify the electric maintenance to check the protection circuit.
4) Reduce the load, close down the water valve or air valve and start again. If the starting is not
successful, stop the power and inform the maintenance to deal with it.
8.10.1.3 When starting or running, there are sparks or smoke in the motor.
1) Stop the operation of motor.
2) Report to the shift supervisor to disconnect the motor and measure its insulation.
3) Inform the electric maintenance to check and deal with it.
101
8.10.1.4 Trip immediately when starting, and there is no impact vibration phenomenon.
1) Check that the switching mechanism is free of loose and poor connection without power.
2) Check the switch control power insurance and the closing coil for problems.
3) Check whether there is any problem with the auxiliary switch contact and wiring.
4) If no obvious fault is found in the above inspection, the switch shall be pulled out to the test
position for the combined tripping test. If the test is good, it can be transmitted power for another
start, and if the start is not successful, notify the electrical maintenance to deal with it.
8.10.1.5 The motor in operation changes suddenly in sound and the ammeter reading rises or
falls to zero.
1) Check the stator circuit with no power if there is one phase breakage.
2) Check if the machine is out of order.
3) Check if the system voltage is below the allowable value.
4) Whether the current of the motor stator oscillates periodically during operation.
5) Observe whether mechanical load changes periodically.
6) Check if the rotor is damaged out of power.
7) For winding motor, the fault of slip-ring short circuit device or rheostat shall be checked.
8.10.1.6 The motor runs over load and the temperature is too high.
1) Reduce the load, and when it can not be reduced, add the standby motor.
2) Increase ventilation, add fan cooling or open vent.
3) Check the water system of air cooler for failures.
4) If the above treatment is invalid, stop the power and check if the inside of motor and the
machine have fault.
8.10.1.7 The motor vibrates violently.
1) Contact the operator on duty to start the standby motor immediately and stop the failure
motor.
2) Check that the motor base and anchor bolts at the fixes base are fastened.
3) Disconnect the motor and mechanical coupling for maintenance when power is off. See if
motor fault is caused by idle starting motor.
4) Check the tightness of the end cover. If the bearing is external, check the fixation of bearing
base.
5) If it is a motor failure and the reasons are not found out through the above inspection, the
maintenance personnel shall disassemble the motor, check whether the rotor is balanced, and check
the bearing and other conditions.
102
8.10.2 Accident Treatment

8.10.2.1 In case of any of the following circumstances, the motor shall disconnect the power
supply immediately and stop its operation:
1) In case of a personal accident requiring immediate suspension of the motor.
2) When the motor and the driven machinery are damaged to the dangerous degree.
8.10.2.2 In the following cases, for important plant motors, the standby motor units can be
started and then stopped:
1) The motor makes an abnormal sound or the insulation has a burnt smell.
2) There are sparks or smoke in the motor or starting regulating device.
3) The stator current exceeds normal value.
4) Strong vibration occurs.
5) Failure occurs in large closed cooling water system.
6) The temperature of bearing is not allowed to rise.
7) If the blocking important motor used in the plant is no standby motor or the standby motor
cannot be started quickly, the blocked motor can be overlapped in order to ensure power supply,
except for the following situations:
8) There is obvious short circuit or damage on the starting regulating device of motor or power
cable.
9) Personal accident requiring shutdown occurs.
10) Machinery to the motor damages.
8.10.2.3 No operator on duty is allowed to disconnect the plant motor manually within 1
minute when the important motor used in the plant loses voltage or voltage drops.
8.10.2.4 To extinguish motor fire, motor power must be disconnected. When extinguishing
the fire, use the special fire extinguisher for electrical equipment or use the fire water machine to
spray mist water beads to extinguish the fire. It is forbidden to inject large water into the motor.
103
9 Operation Procedures of DC System

9.1 Operation Mode of DC System
9.1.1 Normal Operation Mode
9.1.1.1 The DC busbar of the centralized control building is a single busbar mode, and two single
busbars of two accumulators are set to operate in sections; The parallel operation mode of the two-
section busbar can only be adopted in some cases of fault or maintenance. After the fault is dealt
with and the maintenance work is completed, switch to the normal operation mode in time.
9.1.1.2 The Normal Operation Mode of DC System of Unit #3A and #3B
1) DC busbar operation: The outlet switch 1QF21 of accumulator is closed, the switch 1QF11
of high-frequency charger supplying power to DC busbar is closed, and the switch 1QF12 of high-
frequency charger supplying power to accumulator floating charge is closed; the section switch
1QF22 of 1 and 2 groups of busbar is disconnected. The test switch 1QF3 is disconnected.
9.1.1.3 The Normal Operation Mode of GIS DC System
2) DC busbar equipment: The outlet 2QF21 of accumulator is closed, the switch 2QF11 of
high-frequency charger supplying power to DC busbar is closed, and the switch 2QF12 of high-
9.1.1.4 The Normal Operation Mode of Coal Handling DC System
The DC system for coal transportation is simple single busbar; Normal AC power switch 1QF
of high-frequency charger is closed, the switch 1QF11 of high-frequency charger supplying power
to DC busbar is closed, the outlet switch 1QF21 of accumulator is closed, the switch 1QF12 of
high-frequency charger supplying power to accumulator floating charge is closed, and the switch
1QF3 used for test is disconnected.
9.1.2 The operation mode when the high-frequency charger fails:
9.1.2.1 When the high-frequency charger of # 1 has fault or maintenance, the switch 1QF21 of 1
busbar is in broken bits, the contact switch 1QF22 and 2QF22 of I, II section busbar shall be closed
first, then disconnect the AC switch 1QF of high-frequency charger of #1 and output 1QF11. The
high-frequency charger of #1 stops working. The operation condition is the DC busbars of I, II
104
section run in parallel. The high-frequency charger of # 2 and the accumulator set of # 2 are DC
power supply.
9.1.2.2 When the high-frequency charger of # 2 has fault or maintenance, the switch 2QF21 of 2
busbar is in broken bits, the contact switch 1QF22 and 2QF22 of I, II section busbar shall be closed
first, then disconnect the AC switch 2QF of high-frequency charger of #1 and output 2QF11. The
high-frequency charger of #2 stops working. The operation condition is that the DC system of I, II
section runs in parallel, and high-frequency charger of #1 and accumulator of #1 are DC power
supply.
9.1.3 The battery outlet switch on the single bus and the contact switch to the other bus are
mutually locked. Unlocking is strictly prohibited.
9.1.4 The two sets of busbars run normally, powered by the high-frequency charger, and the
accumulator is supplied with floating charge at the same time. When the loss power high-frequency
charger of AC power exits, the accumulator provides power to the load continuously. The DC
feeder screen provides the system output load.
9.1.5 The DC load screen is equipped with several feeder switches, and the fuse of each switch is
equipped with alarm monitoring device. When the fuse is blown, an alarm signal is sent.
9.2 Operation
9.2.1 High-Frequency Charger Input and Stop Operation
9.2.1.1 High-frequency charger input:
1) Send the rectifier unit AC power switch of #1(#2),
2) Close the 1(2)QF1, 1(2)QF2 switch on the lower part of high-frequency charger screen.
3) Close the power switch of rectifier module
4) Check that the rectifier module starts normally and the voltage indicator is normal
5) Close the DC output switch of rectifier 1QF11 (2QF11).
6) Check that the voltage indication of DC busbar is normal
9.2.1.2 High-frequency chargers out of service:
1) Open the power switch of rectifier module
2) Open the 1(2)QF1, 1(2)QF2 switch on the lower part of rectifier screen.
3) Open the DC output switch of rectifier 1QF11 (2QF11)
4) Open the high-frequency charger AC power switch 1QF(2QF)
9.2.3 Power Transmission of Busbar:
Power transmission of busbar: Input the high-frequency charger first, close the DC output
switch of the high-frequency charger, check the monitoring module for that the DC system voltage
is normal, close the outlet switch of the accumulator, and the charger is controlled by the
105
monitoring module after starting up; Check that the system is working normally. Close the switch of
feeder load as required.
9.2.4 Filling Equally Operation:
In the process of equipment operation, the charging operation of the accumulator is completed
automatically by the system monitoring and detection of relevant data without any manual
intervention.
9.3 Operation Monitoring
9.3.1 DC Busbar Monitoring
9.3.1.1 Under normal operation of DC busbar, voltage fluctuation shall not exceed ±5% of rated
value 220V, the maximum shall not exceed ±10% of rated value 220V, and ripple factor shall not
exceed 5%.
9.3.1.2 The voltage of DC busbar and insulation monitoring
The DC busbar voltage and ground insulation resistance are monitored by the JZ-MC-V
microcomputer DC system insulation monitor. When the DC busbar voltage exceeds the set value,
the device sends the corresponding voltage abnormal signal; When the DC system finds a ground
(including a branch), the device sends an alarm signal and displays the grounding circuit and
resistance value automatically.
9.3.2 Temperature of DC System
9.3.2.1 Temperature: -15℃〜40℃;
9.3.2.2 Altitude: Lower than 2000m;
9.3.2.3 Relative Humidity: Less than 90%;
9.3.2.4 Work Location: Any direction deviating from the benchmark position 5° can work normally;
9.3.2.5 Where used: There is no conductive dust and corrosive gas which damages the insulation;
No violent vibration or impact; Shall have the facility that defends rain, wind and sand.
9.3.3 Maintenance in the Normal Operation
9.3.3.1 In the normal operation process, there is no need to operate any switch in the panel, and the
panel feeder switching can be switched as required;
9.3.3.2 Check the DC system twice per shift, check the monitoring module or the upper computer,
check the operating parameters of all parts of the equipment, and record the abnormality and alarm;
9.3.3.3 The set value, display value, alarm threshold value and alarm signal of each functional unit
of the corresponding equipment shall be checked and calibrated comprehensively every year. In
case of any abnormality or failure, electrical maintenance personnel shall handle it.
9.3.3.4 Under normal operation condition, non-operation personnel forbid any switch on the
operation panel, and non-maintenance personnel forbid modifying the parameters of system
operation.
106
9.3.3.5 The Operation and Maintenance of Accumulator

The operator on duty in the operation of the accumulator shall inspect the accumulator
according to the specified period. It shall be checked whenever the weather changes. The inspection
contents are as follows:
1) Indoor temperature is normal and the lighting shall be intact.
2)The plastic cylinder and safety valve of the accumulator shall be completely free of cracking.
3) The accumulator is free of leakage and acid climbing.
4) The single-cell voltage detection connection is intact and the plug is inserted normally.
5) Accumulator room and storage battery shall be clean, and the indoor fire equipment shall be
intact.
9.4 Fault Analysis and Treatment of DC System
9.4.1 AC Failure Alarms
9.4.1.1 When AC voltage is loss, start up automatically after AC power is restored;
9.4.1.2 The pressure sensitive resistance RV triggers the trip of the circuit breaker to replace the
pressure sensitive resistance;
9.4.2 Abnormal Alarm of Rectifier Module
If the red light of "failure" on the front panel is on during the operation of the module, it
indicates that the module is shut down for some reason. Perform these steps:
9.4.2.1 Check if other modules in parallel are normal. If other modules are abnormal, it may be
caused by overvoltage/undervoltage input and overvoltage output.
9.4.2.2 If other modules are normal, the fault of this module can be judged:
1) Switch off the front panel of the module, pull out the DC output plug of the module and the
monitoring parallel terminal.
2) Check whether the AC input of the module is normal.
3) Close the switch on the front panel of the module again to check whether there is DC output.
If there is, adjust the "voltage regulation" potentiometer and set the DC output as 220V. If there is
no DC output, the fault of the module can be adjusted and it shall be sent to the manufacturer for
inspection.
9.4.3 Feeder Switch Tripping Alarms
Check the handle status of the feeder circuit breaker on the DC feeder panel, such as at the
automatic tripping position, check the loop to eliminate overloading or short circuit.
9.4.4 The Reduction Alarm of DC Busbar Insulation
The DC feeder circuit has grounding phenomenon, check the specific grounding circuit
displayed by the insulation monitoring device, and eliminate the grounding situation.
107
9.4.5 Search for the DC System Grounding

9.4.5.1 Check that which monitoring device pole of DC busbar insulation is grounded, judge the
degree of grounding and report to the shift supervisor.
9.4.5.2 Searching the Busbar Loads on Branches
1) Contact the duty personnel of machine, furnace, thermal to close the operation of the
machine, electricity, furnace in the central control room and signal power. If grounding is found,
find out which plate is grounded further and put its branch fuse (or air switch) separately.
2) Contact the thermal control duty personnel to search the thermal equipment.
3) Contact the related personnel to close the DC busbar all the loads on branches in sequence to
search.
4) Stop the rectifier charging device for searching.
5) Search for wire and accumulator equipment:
6) Turn on the charging device of rectifier, merge it into the busbar, adjust the charge/discharge
ammeter accumulator to zero, pull the total fuse of the accumulator outlet to distinguish between the
busbar grounding or the accumulator grounding.
7) For grounding busbar, the total fuse of accumulator outlet shall be closed immediately, and
restore the accumulator in parallel. After the grounding busbar is determined, search for the
secondary device on the busbar. When searching for the busbar insulation device, use a multimeter
or test pencil to appraisal whether it is grounding. Stop the further searching for busbar when power
cut the busbar load or through the loop pour electricity when necessary.
8) If the accumulator is grounded, the accumulator circuit shall be further searched. Measure
the cable insulation from the accumulator to DC busbar so as to distinguish between cable or
accumulator grounding. After the fault is eliminated, the output of the charging rectifier shall be
adjusted to make the accumulator voltage consistent with the busbar voltage, and then the total fuse
of the accumulator shall be closed to restore the parallel operation of accumulator.
9) After the grounding is found, restore the normal operation mode of the DC system.
9.4.6 Treatment during the Blown off of the Total Fuse of Accumulator
9.4.6.1 Fuse Breakage Alarm of Accumulator
When the DC system is overloaded or short circuit occurs, find the reason first, contact maintenance
personnel in time, and replace the corresponding fuse and the attached alarm contact.
9.4.6.2 Treatment
1)If the floating charging device does not trip, the switch on shall be pulled as soon as possible,
DC motor and the power for accident lighting load shall be opened to ensure power supply for
operation. And the output current of the floating charging device shall be adjusted timely to keep
the voltage of busbar normal.
108
2) If the floating charging device has tripped, it shall be re-opened immediately after the above
load power supply is disconnected, so as to ensure the power supply for the operation.
3) Pull the battery fuse quickly. After finding out the reason and replacing the fuse, make the
battery back into the busbar operation, and adjust the current of the floating charging device timely.
And restore the opened air switch of DC loaded power supply.
4) If the accumulator can not resume operation, do not open DC motor as far as possible, and
maintain the operation of DC system.
9.5 DC System Protection
9.5.1 Input protection: If there is overvoltage or undervoltage on the input power of the charger,
the charger will stop immediately. When the power is restored to normal, it will start automatically
and continue to run.
9.5.2 Output overvoltage protection: When the output voltage of the charging module is greater
than the output limit value, the charging module stops and will not start automatically. The charging
module shall be powered off before starting up.
9.5.3 Overcurrent protection: Regardless of the causes of overcurrent, the charger will stop, and
start automatically after a period of time.
9.5.4 Overtemperature protection: When the temperature of main devices in the charger at more
than 65±5 °C, the charger will stop automatically, and start automatically after returning to normal
temperature.
9.5.5 Setting Range of Alarm:
9.5.5.1 Busbar overvoltage: 242V; Set now (235V)
9.5.5.2 Busbar undervoltage: 198V; Set now (220V)
9.5.5.3 Positive ground resistance: 10KΩ
9.5.5.4 Negative ground resistance: 10KΩ
9.6 Accumulator out of Operation Management
The unit battery shall be stored in the dry and frost-free room after full charging. It is strictly
forbidden to make the battery exit or long-term storage after insufficient or deep discharge. When
the battery exit or storage is seriously short of capacity due to its self-discharge, it shall be
recharged immediately and its capacity shall be restored.
9.7 Equipment Specification of DC System
9.7.1 High-frequency Charger Screen
The high-frequency charger adopts the rectification module of high-frequency switch and
operates in parallel with multiple units, the output is of the stable voltage and current limited,
charge for battery flotation and load at the same time, and provide charging equally function under
the management of monitoring module.
109
9.7.2 Main Technical Indexes of Chargers:

Model: JZ - 22020H
AC input: 260~500V, 50Hz±2%;
DC output: Rated current is 20ADC; Voltage regulation range is 198~297V;
Limited current: 0~20ADC;
Stable voltage accuracy: ≤±0.5%;
Ripple factor: ≤±1%;
9.7.3 Accumulator
The battery is valve-controlled lead-acid free maintenance accumulator, which has the
advantages of simple operation and maintenance, long service life and no pollution. The storage
battery can be used as backup power transmitting power to the load.
9.7.3.1 Main Technical Parameters of Accumulator
Model name: GFM - 1000AH Nominal voltage: 2V/piece
Rated capacity: 1000AH
Floating charge voltage: 2.25V/piece (20°C)
Average charge voltage: 2.35V/piece (20℃)
Battery size: 434×175×353mm/piece
Battery weight: 66kg
In the supporting state, the floating charge and intermittent discharge of 20 ℃ condition, the
life expectancy is more than 12 years.
9.7.4 Discharging Requirements of Accumulator:
9.7.4.1 Charging mode of accumulator has two kinds:
When the environment temperature is 20 ℃, the floating charge voltage is 2.25 V/only ±1%;
For quick charging after discharge, the maximum voltage is 2.35V/piece. After charging at
2.35V/piece, the rectifier must be set to a stable limited current state; When the ambient
temperature fluctuates, the floating charge voltage is adjusted according to the following table.
Relationship between temperature and floating charge voltage (20 ℃):
Temperature ℃ V/piece
+5 2.31
+10 2.29
+15 2.27
+20 2.25
+25 2.23
+30 2.21
110
+35 2.20
9.7.4.2 Charging Requirements of Accumulator

In deep discharge and improper charge, it shall be balanced charge, with 2.35 V/piece for 48
hours charging voltage and charging current shall not exceed 250 A. If the temperature of battery
exceeds 45 ℃ when charging, charge shall be interrupted or switched to floating charge status, so as
to make the temperature drop.
111
10 Operation Procedures of UPS System

10.1 Overview
10.1.1 In order to ensure the distributed control system (DCS), the electrical automation system
(ECS), automatic device, thermal protection, intelligent device, control device and thermal
instrument for uninterruptible power supply of unstopped power load, the AC unstopped power
supply equipment UPS, with the capacity of 80 KVA, for three-phase three-wire AC input voltage
380 V, 50 HZ, the output voltage for the three-phase four-wire 380/220 V, 50 HZ.
10.1.2 The UPS device is provided by Qingdao LDC.
10.1.3 The main cabinet of UPS includes rectifier, inverter, static bypass switch and control system
modules; Bypass tank mainly includes bypass voltage regulator.
10.1.4 The main power supply of the unit UPS comes from the security PCA section of the unit,
and the power supply of the bypass comes from the security PCB section of the unit.
10.1.5 The operation principle of UPS is as Fig. 30-1.
MAINTENA
NCE
BYPASS
BIP INPUT
RECTIFIER
RECTIFIER
ISOLATION
INPUT
3×380V150Hz
TRANSFRMR AC OUTPUT
(OPTIONAL) 220/380
DC LINK
RECTIFIER INVERTER OUTPUTCB
RECTIFIER
CB
External
battery
384VDC
Fig. 30-1 The Operation of UPS
112
10.2 Equipment Specification

10.2.1 UPS Technical Specification:
Items Parameter
UPS model SDP SERIES DB11080
AC input voltage range of UPS 380V/400V/415 AC (-20%〜+30%)
Frequency range of UPS AC input 50/60Hz(±7Hz)
Output voltage range of UPS 220V AC±1%,
UPS output power 80KVA
Full-load output power factor of UPS 0.8
Efficiency DC-AC 93%
Static switching time ≤0.5ms
≤110% Continuous
Overload capacity of
110%〜125% 10 min
UPS
125%〜150% 1 min
Waveform Sine wave
Distortion factor of total harmonic ﹤2%(Linear load 100%),﹤5%(Non-linear load 100%)
(THD)
Protection Overload and short circuit protection
Dynamic response of 100% load step 5%
Switching time between inverter and ﹤0.4ms
bypass
Resistance noise ratio ﹤68dB
10.3 Operation Mode

10.3.1 In normal operation, the load is supplied by the main power supply through the rectifier and
inverter, and the DC power supply and bypass power supply are in the standby state.
10.3.2 When the input AC power of rectifier is lost, the inverter will switch to the power supply
mode of the factory distribution DC power supply automatically and continuously. When the input
AC power supply of the rectifier is restored, it is restored to normal operation mode automatically.
10.3.3 The power supply mode of the static bypass is switched to automatically by UPS in the case
of the power supply interruption of the DC power supply side of the inverter, low DC voltage or
inverter failure, output overloading or protection interference, etc.
10.3.4 Under normal circumstances, the bypass power supply is switched to the hot standby power
supply used as the output power supply of the inverter after passing the isolation transformer and
the voltage stabilizer in the bypass cabinet.
10.3.5 When the UPS device needs to be repaired, the manual maintenance bypass power supply
the power.
10.4 The Start-up/Shutdown of UPS
10.4.1 The Inspection before Starting
113
10.4.1.1 Before the first operation and after maintenance, the insulation resistance of the
system measured by the 500V megger shall be no less than 0.5 megohm.
10.4.1.2 Check that all switches are disconnected and each part of the system is connected
tightly.
10.4.1.3 Make sure the electric phase of neutral wire is as the same as that of the grounding
wire.
10.4.1.4 Make sure that the input voltage, frequency and phase sequence are normal.
10.4.2 Switch UPS from Cooling Standby to Normal Operation
10.4.2.1 Check that UPS is in standby mode; The main input switch, battery switch, bypass
input switch, output switch and manual maintenance bypass switch of UPS main cabinet are all
disconnected; The battery cabinet switch is at the disconnection position; The input switch of
bypass cabinet unit UPS also includes output switch 1 and output switch 2) at the disconnection
position; the incoming switch of feeder cabinet and all load switches are at disconnection position.
10.4.2.2 The main input power of UPS and the by-pass input power supply are powered
respectively.
10.4.2.3 Close the input switch of bypass cabinet and the UPS equipment begins to supply
power to the user.
10.4.2.4 Close the switch of main power input and the rectifier will operate automatically. At
this time, the output DC voltage of rectifier rises to the rated value gradually to provide DC output
to the inverter.
10.4.2.5 Start the inverter (press "I" to start the key and "INTERVER" at the same time). At
this time, UPS starts operating at the normal working mode.
10.4.2.6 Close the DC input switch.
10.4.2.7 Check the panel indicator light is displayed correctly.
10.4.3 That the power of UPS is supplied by the inverter power supply switches to maintaining the
bypass manually, and the operation of UPS device is exited.
10.4.3.1 The inverter stops running (press the "0" inverter to switch the switch key and
"INTERVER" key at the same time, then the static switch switches to output automatically from the
output of bypass power source to the load.
10.4.3.2 Disconnect the switch of DC input.
10.4.3.3 Disconnect the input switch of main power supply.
10.4.3.4 Close the bypass switch of manual repair.
10.4.3.5 Disconnect the input switch of bypass.
10.4.4 That the power of UPS is supplied by maintaining the bypass manually switches to the
inverter power supply, and the operation of UPS device is restored
114
10.4.4.1 Close the input switch of bypass power, and the bypass power is as output.
10.4.4.2 Disconnect the bypass switch of manual repair.
10.4.4.3 Close the switch of main power input. At this time, the rectifier will operate
automatically to provide DC output to the inverter.
10.4.4.4 Close the DC input switch.
10.4.4.5 The inverter is put into operation and at this time, UPS starts operating at the normal
working mode.
10.4.5 The Stop of UPS
10.4.5.1 When the inverter stops running, the static switch switches to output from the bypass
power supply to the load automatically.
10.4.5.2 Disconnect the switch of DC input.
10.4.5.3 Disconnect the input switch of main power supply.
10.4.5.4 Disconnect the power input switch of bypass and the output of the UPS device will
be interrupted completely after the switch is disconnected.
10.4.5.5 When all input power is disconnected, UPS is shut down completely.
10.5 Operation Monitoring and Maintenance
10.5.1 Monitoring Content
10.5.1.1 All components inside the cabinet have no abnormal sound, abnormal stink, and no
overheating phenomenon.
10.5.1.2 The cooling fan in the cabinet operates normally and the ambient temperature is
within the allowed range.
10.5.1.3 Check the output voltage of bypass, output voltage of inverter, load voltage, rectifier
voltage are all normal. The output frequency is normal and the indicator light glows correctly.
10.5.1.4 Check that the main line current, output current of inverter, output current of UPS,
output current peak of UPS, battery current of load current, total DC current and battery
temperature are normal.
10.5.1.5 The output current of UPS device is normal, and load current does not exceed the
rated value.
10.5.1.6 All the switches on the UPS disc are in the closing position. If it not closed, the
cause shall be ascertained.
10.5.1.7 The bypass and the isolating regulating transformer are in normal operation.
10.5.1.8 The operation status indicator is correct according to the actual operation mode, and
there is no abnormal alarm indicator.
10.5.2 LED Indicator
115
The colorful LED indicator on the control panel is used to reflect the status of the relevant part.
Red indicates fault or in abnormal status (usually accompanied by sound alarm), and green indicates
normal operation status. The LED indicator light definition of UPS control panel is shown in table
5-2.
Table 5-2 UPS Control Panel LED Indicator Definition
S/N Indicator light Meaning Color

1 BYPASS Bypass in normal Green
2 B/P Output is bypass power supply Red
3 OVERLOAD Overload Red
4 BATTERYTEST The voltage of battery is abnormal Red
5 SYNC The inverter (and bypass) synchronizes Green
normally
6 CHARGER The rectifier is running normally Green
7 INVERTER The inverter is running normally Green
8 INV The output supplies power to the Green
inverter
9 LOADLEVEL Load capacity Green
10 LOADLEVEL The load capacity exceeds 100% Red
10.6 Fault Diagnosis and Treatment

When UPS stops working in normal state, operators shall check the display panel at the first
time to get relevant information, and find corresponding countermeasures according to the LED
alarm indicator light and sound alarm in table 5-3.
Table 5-3 Diagnosis and Treatment of UPS Fault
Information Light and sound alarm Status Description Disposal Methods

FAULTCONDITION!SERV The result of self-test did Please contact the
--
ICEREQUIERD not pass maintenance service center
UPSOFF -- UPS is in off state Press ON/OFF to start
Check the main input switch
UPS shutdown due to power
UPSOFFINPUTISLOW -- RECTIFIER and power
interruption
distribution cabinet
When the alternating current The related load shall be shut
BATTERYUNDERLOAD 'Beep' every 4s is interrupted, the inverter is down before the end of the
supplies by battery battery discharge
The indicator of BYPASS The fault of bypass power Check the power supply and
BYPASSVOLTFAULT
does not work supply switch of bypass
(At startup) the bypass is
LOADTRANSFERINGPLE
B/P lights up (red) switching with the inverter --
ASEWAIT
(about 40s)
(This information occurs
The display of when you switch UPS from
Please contact the
LOADTRANSFERINGPLE B/P lights up (red) bypass to inverter by
maintenance service center
ASEWAIT is beyond 3s pressing the B/PINV button)
inverter failure
INVERTERFAULT The light of INVERTER Inverter fault Please contact the
116
doesn't work maintenance service center

Retest the battery after 2
The battery is not properly
The light of BATTERY hours. If the battery still fails,
BATTERYLOW connected or the discharge
doesn't work please contact the
voltage is too low
Please contact the
RECTIFIERFAULT --- Rectifier failure
The inverter is not Please contact the
--- SYNC light is out
synchronous with bypass maintenance service center
OVER increases and LOAD
OVERLOAD Overload Adjust to reduce load
light is on
Please contact the
Other information A continuous sound alarm
No information Reboot UPS
117
11 The Operation Procedures of Security System

11.1 Overview
11.1.1 Unit of #3A and 3B have two sections of emergency PC busbar respectively, which are
mutually backed up by tie switch.
11.1.2 In order to ensure reliable emergency shutdown and boiler shutdown of the whole plant of
Jeneponto Power Plant Phase II and avoid equipment damage, a 536kW diesel engine driven
generator set is equipped to unit of #3A and #3B as the emergency AC power source of the unit, to
supply power to the two sections of the emergency PC busbar of the unit.
11.1.3 The interlocking and automatic switching logic of each security MCC section and standby
power switch shall be realized by DCS. The start and stop control of diesel generator set is realized
by diesel generator set control system and local PLC cabinet and DCS.
11.2 Equipment Specification 11.2.1 Diesel Engine Driven Generator Specification:
Technical parameter of generator

Model C700 D5
Rated capacity 640KVA
Rated power 512 KW
Rated voltage 400 V
Rated current 924 A
Rated power factor (lagged) 0.80
Rated speed 1500 r/min
Rated frequency 50 Hz
No. of phases 3
Stator winding Y
Production Date 10/10/2016
Serial No. V2684J16H006047
11.2.2 PLC Control Cabinet in place

11.2.2.1 Overview
The control system of diesel engine driven generator is composed of controller PC1.2,
Cummins speed adjustment system, Cummins pressure adjustment system, PLC control cabinet,
DCS and auxiliary heating system. PLC control cabinet is mainly used for operation, monitoring
and circuit breaker control. The main components include Siemens PLC system (composed of CPU
module, digital input-output module, analog input-output module and communication module) and
touch screen, voltage transmitter, ComAp controller, switch power module and accumulator charger.
11.2.2.2 Main principles and functions
Diesel engine driven generator unit is mainly controlled by the engine body. PLC cabinet can
be controlled and monitored remotely through interconnection. The control system of generator unit
body is composed of controller PC1.2, speed control module, pressure adjustment module, auxiliary
118
sensor and actuator. Sensors such as rotation speed, oil pressure and water temperature installed by
the generator set are connected directly to PC1.2, and the thermodynamic parameters of the
generator set are displayed and protected by it. The generator unit is installed with two sets of
current mutual inductors. One group enters PC1.2 to display current, power and other current and
current protection to the generator unit; Another group enters ComAp controller for power
measurement of controller and the control of output power during parallel operation; Protection of
generator unit shall be completed by PC1.2.
The control circuit of auxiliary equipment of generator unit mainly consists of two water
heaters, one oil heaters and activated accumulator. The oil supply, water heaters and accumulator
are fed by the 220V auxiliary power supply of the plant and charged by the main switch to each
auxiliary equipment distribution switch. Heater operation and accumulator charging and generator
unit operating signal interlock. When the unit is running, disconnect the charging and heating.
The 400V voltage of two busbar lines and the 400V voltage of two busbar lines used in factory
are connected to the PLC analog input module through the three-phase voltage transmitter
respectively, which is used for the three-phase voltage sampling of different busbar lines or power
used in the factory by PLC and realize the judgment of power loss and voltage display. At the same
time, select one way of the four-way voltage input through the switching of four relays to enter the
ComAp controller for parallel synchronous busbar voltage or voltage sampling used for the plant
power to realize synchronous closing and parallel operation.
Logic control PLC circuit is the main control circuit of PLC cabinet, which is composed of
three circuits: Switch input/output, analog quantity input/output and communication. The switch
input includes operation state of the unit, operation state of ComAp controller, position state of
circuit breaker, control mode, parallel selection and user input signal; The output includes
controlling the start and stop of the generator unit, the opening/closing coordination of the
controller, the opening/closing controlling of the circuit breaker and output signal of the user. The
two busbar lines voltage and two voltage sampling used in the plant power of analog input are used
for voltage display and power loss judgment; Output one way to ComA controller used for power
setting during parallel operation, and other output to different functions and users.
ComAp controller is mainly used for opening and closing commands, parallel synchronous
closing and output power control during parallel operation. ComAp's switch control command is
completed in coordination with PLC. The controller receives the GCB button instruction of the PLC
(when the GCB is in the closing state, the instruction is the clos5ing instruction; GCB is in the
opening state, the instruction is the closing command), GCB position feedback, MCB button
instruction (when MCB in the closing state, the instruction is the opening, when MCBA is in the
opening condition, the instruction is the closing command), MCB position feedback, the signal that
can be loaded (when the signal is closed, the controller works and the related functions are started;
When the signal is disconnected, the controller stops working). The controller outputs GCB closing
command, GCB opening command, MCB closing command, MCB opening command and alarm
and fault signal to PLC.
119
The cabinet is installed with 220V AC /24V DC switching power supply module and
accumulator charging module. The charging module of accumulator is input from the power used in
the plant of 220V, and output to the accumulator of generator set for floating charging; The
operating state of the generator set is interlocked, the unit stops floating charging while running,
and the unit puts floating charge automatically when it stops running. The power supply of PLC
cabinet is provided by 24V DC working power supply and control power supply to PLC cabinet
from external 220V AC power supply through switch power module.
11.3 Operation Mode of Security Power
11.3.1 In normal operation, each security PC section is powered by the corresponding low-voltage
unit PC (working power supply), and the feeder switch and incoming switch of working power
supply are closed; Contact switch is in hot standby state, and the incoming switch of standby power
is in hot standby state. Diesel engine driven generators are put into "automatic" standby mode.
11.3.2 When the power is lost in the security PC section, the diesel engine driven generator will be
started automatically and the operation mode will be changed automatically (from working power
supply to security power).
11.3.3 In the emergency state, the "emergency switch button" is set in the control console of the
central control room. The operator presses the button manually to start the diesel engine driven
generator. When the voltage construction of diesel engine driven generator is completed, close the
backup power inlet switch.
11.4 Operation of Diesel Engine Driven Generator
11.4.1 The operation of diesel engine driven generator unit is composed of controller operation of
generator unit body, PLC cabinet operation and DCS operation. In addition to the menu operation
of the controller itself, there are also local/remote switching, local start/stop, emergency stop and
reset operations. The operation of PLC cabinet mainly includes the selection switch operation on
the cabinet door panel, emergency stop and touch screen operation. DCS operation is mainly
implemented by DCS in "automatic" mode.
11.4.2 The operation of PLC cabinet is mainly divided into operation mode selection, parallel
selection, emergency stop, manually start & stop, manual GCB (standby power switch of security
section) closing, manual GCB opening, manual MCB (working power supply switch of security
section) closing, silencing, reset and other operations.
11.4.2.1 The cabinet door of PLC is installed with "operation selection" switch, which can be
divided into "test", "manual" and "automatic"
4 locations of "shutdown" to choose from.
11.4.2.2 "Test" position: The diesel engine driven generator sets simulates the power loss
used in the plant and starts automatically, but does not output GCB closing signal, and does not
supply power to the external.
120
11.4.2.3 "Manual" position: The diesel engine driven generator set is started by input of the
touch screen on the PLC cabinet. After the motor is started and loaded successfully, input GCB
closing signal by the touch screen. Switch on the circuit breaker to power the generator to external
power supply. When the busbar has no power, press the GCB closing button on the touch screen.
The generator adjusts the excitation and rotation speed automatically so that the amplitude, phase
and frequency of its outlet voltage are synchronized with the busbar then the corresponding GCB
closing command is issued. Close the generator outlet circuit breaker to load, but the parallel switch
can only select one of the external power supply.
11.4.2.4 "Automatic" position: The generator set is on standby. When the power used in the
plant is lost, the generator set starts, closes and loads automatically.
11.4.2.5 "Shutdown" position: Automatic start fails, and the unit is in maintenance condition.
11.4.3 The Starting of Diesel Engine Driven Generator Unit
11.4.3.1 The starting of diesel engine driven generator unit can be started automatically under
the controller of the generator body, PLC cabinet, DCS operation and automatic mode.
11.4.3.2 When the diesel engine driven generator unit starts on the body, press "manual" on
the unit controller PC1.2 and then press the "start" button to start the diesel engine driven generator.
11.4.3.3 Only when the unit controller PC1.2 is in "automatic" mode, the PLC cabinet and
DCS can operate and start the diesel engine driven generator unit.
11.4.4 Automatic Start Logic Condition for Unit
11.4.4.1 Logic condition in "test" mode
11.4.4.2 The unit control of PC1.2 is in automatic mode.
11.4.4.3 Switch "run mode selection" to "test" position.
11.4.4.4 Of which the busbar voltage of one way or two ways is lower than the setting value
of power loss judgment, that is, the busbar power loss state, and start up with delay.
11.4.5 Logic Condition of "Manual" Mode
11.4.5.2 Switch "run mode selection" to "manual" position.
11.4.5.3 Press the "Start" button on the touch screen.
11.4.6 Logic Condition in "Automatic" Mode
11.4.6.2 Switch "run mode selection" to "automatic" position.
11.4.6.3 One or two of the busbars is lost power, or DCS starts the input closed.
11.5 Shutdown of Diesel Engine Driven Generator Unit
121
11.5.1 The operation of diesel engine driven generator unit can be stopped in the unit body
controller, PLC cabinet and DCS.
11.5.2 When the shutdown operation is carried out on the ontology controller PC1.2, just press the
"stop" button on the controller module and the generator enters the stop procedure until the
generator enters the stop mode. The "shutdown" button on the template is always in effect
regardless of whether the unit controller is in "automatic" or "manual" mode. Therefore, when GCB
is in the closing position, do not stop the operation in the diesel engine driven generator body unit.
11.5.3 Shutdown Logic Condition of "Manual" Mode
11.5.3.2 Switch "run mode selection" to "manual" position.
11.5.3.3 The GCB switch between diesel engine driven generator and two busbar sections is
in the "opening" position.
11.5.3.4 Press the "Shutdown" button on the touch screen.
11.5.4 Shutdown Logic Condition in "Automatic" Mode
11.5.4.1 The unit control PC1.2 is in automatic mode.
11.5.4.2 Switch "run mode selection" to "automatic" position.
11.5.4.3 The GCB switch between diesel engine driven generator and two busbar sections is
in the "opening" position.
11.5.4.4 Close the shutdown input of DCS stop and delay automatic stop (adjustable time).
11.6 Emergency Stop of Diesel Engine Driven Generator
11.6.1 The emergency stop of diesel engine driven generator includes the button of manual
"emergency stop" and emergency stop of diesel engine driven generator fault. The generator body
and the PLC cabinet have the "emergency stop" button. In any case, press the "emergency stop"
button at any place
Button, the diesel engine driven generator will execute the "emergency stop" action immediately
and perform a series of actions related to the "emergency stop" simultaneously (such as fault
tripping, etc.).
11.6.2 When the full shutdown of diesel engine driven generator enters the shutdown mode, rotate
to the right to reset the button of "emergency stop",
Prepare for the next starting of diesel engine driven generator.
11.7 GCB and MCB Circuit Breaker Control Operation
11.7.1 GCB means the standby power supply switch of the diesel engine driven generator outlet to
accident security PCA section, PCB section; MCB means the working power supply switch of
accident security section.
122
11.7.2 The opening and closing control of GCB, MCB of PLC cabinet is realized through the
cooperation of PLC and ComAp controller. The PLC sends the initial command to ComAp
controller. After receiving the command, the ComAp controller adjusts the closing and opening
conditions and issues the command allowing closing or opening. And PLC is then used to determine
which circuit breaker controls the closing and opening. The "GCB button" and "MCB button" given
by PLC to ComAp controller are pulse signals, while the rest are holding signals. It is pulse signal
that PLC controls the closing and opening of circuit breakers.
11.7.3 The ComAp controller receives the PLC "can be loaded", "GCB button", "GCB feedback",
"MCB button", "MCB feedback", and outputs the "GCB closing ", "GCB opening", "MCB closing"
and "MCB opening" to the PLC to realize the closing and opening control of GCB or MCB. "Can
be loaded" signal is the precondition for ComAp controller to work. Only when this signal is
provided to ComAp controller can the controller complete the operation process of closing or
opening.
11.7.4 GCB Control Flow of Closing Switch
11.7.4.1 The diesel engine driven generator provides the unit voltage to ComAp after start-up.
(Hold)
11.7.4.2 PLC provides "GCB button" (closing) to ComAp. (Pulse)
11.7.4.3 Note: if the GCB is closed, "GCB button" (closing) signal will be provided
immediately. And if it is a synchronous parallel closing
11.7.4.4 Provide "GCB button" (closing) signal for 5 seconds delayed.
11.7.4.5 ComAp decides whether it is single closing or synchronous parallel closing based on
busbar or voltage used in factory or "MCB feedback".
11.7.4.6 Then issue "GCB closing" command to the PLC. (Pulse)
11.7.4.7 The PLC determines which GCB shall be switched at present, and then outputs the
corresponding GCB closing signal
11.7.4.8 Control the closing on the circuit breaker. (Pulse)
11.7.4.9 After the GCB is closed, the position of circuit breaker is fed back to the PLC. (Hold)
11.7.4.10 PLC provides "GCB feedback" to ComAp.
11.7.5 GCB Control Flow of Opening Switch
11.7.5.1 PLC provides "GCB button" (opening) to ComAp. (Hold)
11.7.5.2 ComAp skips software unloading and issues "GCB opening" to PLC. (Hold)
11.7.5.3 The PLC determines which GCB shall be switched at present, and then outputs the
corresponding GCB opening signal
11.7.5.4 Control the opening of circuit breaker. (Pulse)
123
11.7.5.5 After the MCB is opened, the position of circuit breaker feedback signal is sent to
the PLC. (Hold)
11.7.5.6 PLC disconnects for the "GCB feedback" of ComAp. (Hold)
11.7.6 MCB Control Flow of Closing Switch
When the GCB is switched on, the ComAp controller has received "unit voltage", "loadable",
and "GCB feedback signal", and the following process is executed in this state
11.7.6.1 Provide corresponding in-parallel voltage used in the plant to ComAp. (Hold)
11.7.6.2 PLC provides "MCB button" (closing) to ComAp after 5 seconds delay. (Hold)
11.7.6.3 ComAp makes synchronous adjustment according to unit voltage. When the unit
power supply and the power supply used in the plant are synchronized, issue the "MCB closing"
command to the PLC.
11.7.6.4 (Pulse)
11.7.6.5 The PLC determines which MCB shall be switched at present, and then outputs the
corresponding MCB closing signal
11.7.6.6 Control the closing of the circuit breaker. (Pulse)
11.7.6.7 After the MCB is closed, the position of circuit breaker feedback signal is sent to the
PLC. (Hold)
11.7.6.8 PLC provides "MCB feedback" to ComAp. (Hold)
The PLC cabinet does not operate the opening of the normal process for MCB and the opening
and closing of the connection switch of the normal process. Detect MCB and the circuit breaker
position only when GCB is to be closed. If GCB is to be closed, and the MCB and contact switch
corresponding to GCB are still closed before the release of the closing control signal, issue the
opening control signal to make it open and prevent parallel connection.
11.8 Normal Inspection for Accident Security Section
11.8.1 Check the Standby Status of the Security Power Supply System
11.8.1.1 There shall be no abnormal alarm signal during normal operation of the security
power supply system and there are defects that may cause the busbar power cut in the security
section.
11.8.1.2 The standby power in the accident security section shall be in the normal hot standby
state, and the corresponding relay protection and automatic control devices shall be in good
condition and put into operation. The control, signal and auxiliary power system shall meet the
automatic input requirements of the standby or security power.
11.8.1.3 Diesel engine driven generator shall always be in emergency hot standby mode
unless there are special circumstances. The corresponding fuel, cooling pump, lubricant, storage
battery, intake and exhaust system, etc. are normal, and the measurement, control and
124
communication circuit are normal, which meet the requirements of DCS or console and on-site
emergency start.
11.8.2 Main Inspection Contents in Diesel Engine Driven Generator Unit Standby
11.8.2.1 Diesel engine driven generator unit alarm and alarming shutdown information check.
The indicator light of alarm shutdown status (Shutdown) is out.
11.8.2.2 Switch the "run/ stop/automatic (Run/Off/Auto)" selection of the diesel engine
driven generator to the "automatic (Auto)" position; Non-automatic status indicator (Non-
Automatic) does not flicker.
11.8.2.3 The oil pressure, temperature, coolant temperature and liquid level of the diesel
engine are normal.
11.8.2.4 Accumulator voltage and standby hours are displayed normally.
11.8.2.5 The oil level of diesel engine driven generator is normal.
11.8.2.6 Check that all lines of diesel engine driven generator are normal and all valves are in
correct position.
11.8.2.7 Check the switch status of the power distribution system is correct.
11.8.2.8 Check that the diesel engine room is well ventilated and the temperature is normal.
11.8.2.9 The PCC internal setting value inspection and maintenance of diesel engine driven
generator unit controller is usually performed by the electrical maintenance.
11.8.3 The Monitoring During the Operation of Diesel Engine Driven Generator
11.8.3.1 During the operation of diesel engine driven generator sets, the inspection tour shall
be strengthened, with every half an hour tentatively, and the related parameters shall be checked.
11.8.3.2 Check the smoke color, vibration and noise of diesel engine are normal.
11.8.3.3 Check the electrical system for no abnormal alarm and heating of terminal, electrical
connector, etc.
11.8.3.4 Check the load, current, voltage, frequency (speed) and other parameters of the
diesel engine driven generator are normal.
11.8.3.5 Check the output model of PT/CT and PLC control box for no abnormality and no
abnormal warning and failure indicator light on circuit board. The instrument panel, light and
communication system are normal.
11.8.4 Maintenance of Diesel Engine Driven Generator Unit
11.8.4.1 Check the oil level and oil quality of the diesel engine regularly. Change the oil
timely when the oil quality is abnormal.
11.8.4.2 Check the coolant level regularly and add or replace it when necessary.
125
11.8.4.3 Check the performance of the accumulator regularly and replace the damaged
accumulator in time.
11.8.4.4 Oil filter and air filter shall be cleaned or replaced in time.
11.8.4.5 Carry out the no-load test and on-load test of diesel engine driven unit generator
regularly.
11.8.5 Trial on Diesel Engine Driven Generator Unit
11.8.5.1 Test requirement
1) The no-load test of diesel engine driven generator sets requires no less than 2 times a month
generally; Each no-load running time is 5-10min.
2) The loading test of diesel engine driven generator set is carried out after the unit is shut
down or before starting up, which is generally required to be carried out every half a year or so; The
emergency automatic switching test of power loss in the simulated security section is generally
carried out in combination with the large and small maintenance of the unit. The loading test
requires 1 hour operation with as much load as possible.
3) After the diesel engine driven generator unit is overhauled and before it is put into standby
operation or cold start, the condenser shall be hydrophobic.
11.8.5.2 No-load test
1) Check diesel engine driven generator in hot standby mode.
2) Switch the "operation mode selection" switch of the diesel engine driven generator set to the
"test" position.
3) Check the no-load operation of diesel engine driven generator set starting, frequency
modulation, voltage regulation and stability, and record the operation for 10min operation.
4) Resetting the stop means pressing the button of "emergency stop" to make the diesel engine
driven generator enter the stop procedure; When the diesel engine driven generator stops
completely and enters the stop mode, it can rotate to the right to reset the button of "emergency
stop" to prepare for starting the diesel engine driven generator next time.
11.8.5.3 Load test (simulated loss voltage starting)
1) The load test to simulate the starting of pressure loss shall be carried out when the turbine
generator unit is shut down.
2) Perform switchover test for auxiliary machines connected on the corresponding MCC
busbar to be tested, all of which are required to be able to switch normally.
3) When necessary, move the load that has an influence on the operation safety of turbo
generator unit, such as AC seal oil pump, AC oil pump, top shaft oil pump and so on. At the same
time, the load can be increased to test security busbar as much as possible without affecting the
safety under the stopped state of the turbine generator unit.
126
4) Check the emergency hot standby status diesel engine driven generator unit is normal.
5) Check the work, standby and sectional-switch of security PC busbar to be tested. When the
diesel engine driven generator set is started and the frequency and close the outlet switch of diesel
engine driven generator and MCC backup power supply inlet switch of the tested section according
to the procedure after the frequency buildup and voltage buildup are normal.
6) Check and record the starting, frequency adjustment, voltage adjustment and loading
process. Adjust the frequency and potentiometer for voltage adjustment and setting when necessary
7) If necessary, the pressure loss automatic switching function of other security sections can be
tested at this time. The load running time is about 1 hour.
8) In the operation interface of DCS, instructions of "restore working power supply" of each
security PC are issued one by one in a direct control mode to check that each security MCC is
switched to working power supply.
9) Check that all the security PC sections have been operated normally by the working power
supply, and the diesel engine driven generator set has been running without load. Disconnect the
incoming switch of diesel engine driven generator, reset according to the stop & reset method with
no-load test, and put into emergency standby.
11.9 System Abnormality and Accident Treatment
11.9.1 Unstart of Diesel Engine
11.9.1.1 Causes
1) The starting electrical conditions of diesel engine driven generator unit is not complete, or
there are locking conditions.
2) Abnormal accumulator voltage: Uncharged, loosely connected or not clean, abnormal
charging voltage of accumulator charger.
3) Problem with starting motor or motor coil.
4) Fuse is blowout.
5) The circuit of fuel supply is closed, with no fuel supply.
6) The fuel solenoid valve on the injection pump does not operate or the solenoid valve of fuel
tank does not operate.
11.9.1.2 Treatment
1) Check the control and auxiliary power supply of diesel engine driven generator unit, check
that the emergency hot standby state is correct, and there are electric locking such as mechanical
condition without locking start or alarming to shutdown signal. If necessary, restore the
corresponding signal, and try to start once.
2) Check the accumulator voltage, check the charger output and adjust; Clean, tighten wiring
or replace accumulators.
127
3) Reset the control panel and start again; Check the motor or replace it.
4) Check whether the fuse is blowout or not. If it is blown, replace it.
5) Check if the fuel supply circuit valve is open, and open the closed valve on the supply line
of the engine fuel. Check whether there is oil leakage in the pipeline, and the oil level and pressure
are normal. If the oil level is too low, add fuel and exhaust.
6) Check whether the power supply of the solenoid valve is normal or not. Replace if the
solenoid valve is broken.
11.9.2 The diesel engine runs abnormally after starting
11.9.2.1 Abnormal fuel supply, gas in the oil, abnormal fuel control or inadequate combustion.
11.9.2.2 Oil temperature is too low, and viscosity is high.
11.9.2.3 Improper setting of control button for speed and voltage adjustment or wrong idling
operation state.
11.9.2.4 DC control wiring has bad contact, charging machine and battery connection is not
correct, and so on.
11.9.2.5 The setting of PLC controller is incorrect or card has local failures or wiring errors.
11.9.3 Treatment
11.9.3.1 According to the amount and color of smoke exhaust, analyze the combustion, check
the fuel line for bending and leakage, and vent the fuel. Check whether the wiring of fuel control
solenoid valve is normal and whether the power supply is normal.
11.9.3.2 Check the oil temperature and try to warm or replace it.
11.9.3.3 Set the operation mode correctly or adjust the speed and rated voltage.
11.9.3.4 Check and adjust the DC control power and accumulator connection.
11.9.3.5 Check whether the controller has alarm signal or not, and check whether the
indicator light of the corresponding card is normal or not, and whether the fuse is blown out or not,
and make corresponding treatment or inform the maintenance to check replace.
11.9.4 Protection action trip of diesel engine driven generator set stops
11.9.4.1 Causes
1) The pressure is low in oil or high in temperature.
2) The coolant is high in temperature or low in liquid level.
3) Diesel engine unit has overspeed or low frequency.
4) Low voltage and overvoltage of generator.
5) Overcurrent of generator.
6) Inverse power or excitation loss of generator.
128
7) Card has fault.

11.9.4.2 Treatment
1) Check whether the above situation exists and try to eliminate it. If the temperature of
generator unit is too high and the signal can be restored after alarming to shutdown, it can be
restarted once.
2) If there is no specific reason for the inspection, the stop signal for alarm cannot be reset, or
the three times of starting failure, then stop the power, isolate, and contact the maintenance for
processing.
11.9.5 The work to shut down and isolate is decided according to specific situation, which shall
have following content in general
11.9.5.1 The incoming switch of diesel engine driven generator is switched to cold standby or
maintenance status.
11.9.5.2 "Run/stop/automatic" select the position of switch to "stop".
11.9.5.3 The AC/DC auxiliary power supply is cut off, which is inconvenient to the safety of
the maintenance work.
11.9.5.4 Remove the negative extreme power connection of accumulator when necessary.
11.9.5.5 Isolate the related oil, water and other media circuit.
11.9.5.6 If the diesel engine driven generator set trips again when the power supply is
interrupted, it shall be treated as completely interruption of plant's power supply. The fault shall be
checked immediately, and the diesel engine driven generator shall be restarted after isolating the
fault point to supply power for the security PC section. If there are other unit power available, we
shall try to use them, such as changing the operation mode of the primary system, pulling the
temporary power cord and other methods. To ensure reliable power supply without affecting other
diesel engine driven generators or systems, relatively minor security loads shall be removed.
11.9.6 Emergency stop of diesel engine driven generator shall be carried out in the following
situations
11.9.6.1 The diesel engine driven generator set explodes during operation.
11.9.6.2 Diesel engine driven generators spins at high speed, neither turning down nor
stopping.
11.9.6.3 The voltage or current parameters of diesel engine driven generator is over tripping
value, protection of refusing action.
11.9.6.4 Accidents that endanger personal safety or ignition.
11.9.6.5 The diesel engine driven generator unit is out of step or vibrated seriously during the
period of synchronizing parallel.
11.9.7 Security PC section working power supply switch tripping.
129
11.9.7.1 Check whether the diesel engine driven generator set is started, and whether the
incoming switch of standby power in the safety PC section is automatic switching. If it is automatic
switching, check the working power supply switch and feed circuit. After isolation, please maintain
and handle, and switch back to working power by sequential control.
11.9.7.2 If the automatic program control system of diesel engine driven generator set is
abnormal and does not start automatically, the manual gradual power transmission method can be
adopted, that is, check the power loss security PC busbar is fault-free, start the diesel engine, and
export the diesel engine driven generator to the switch of tripping security PC busbar, and then
transmit power to the power failure security PC section.
11.9.7.3 In the case that the diesel engine driven generator system fails to transmit power for
a short time, the working power supply switch can be tested for once on the conditions for checking
the working power supply are available and the switch and busbar are fault-free.
11.9.7.4 In the process of power switching, it is necessary to prevent locking to the fault point
and non-synchronizing parallel. Logical locking conditions must be met to close the switch.
11.9.7.5 The DC power supply shall be paid attention to when using the above methods and
cannot restore the operation of the security PC section busbar in a short time. Auxiliary machines
which can switch to other power supply shall check the switching situation and maintain the main
equipment and limit the influence scope as far as possible.
130
12 Operation Procedures for Relay Protection and Automatic Device

12.1 General Provisions for Relay Protection
12.1.1 In any case, the equipment is not allowed to operate without protection, and partial
protection can be stopped when necessary, but the main protection is not allowed to be stopped at
the same time (such as differential protection, heavy gas protection, etc.).
12.1.2 The constant value of the relay protection of equipment that is input and stopped operation,
automatic device or adjustment of relay protection must have the command of scheduling or the
shift supervisor.
12.1.3 Change the constant value of protection and automatic device, or switch the voltage and
current terminals of protection and automatic device in operation, or change the PT fuse used for
protection and automatic device, etc., shall stop the relevant protection first.
12.1.4 When the protection outlet pressure plate is put into use, it is necessary to measure that there
is no the pressure difference between the two ends of the pressure plate with high-resistance DC
voltmeter before it is put into use.
12.1.5 After the protection, in principle, it shall be confirmed by the guarantor before it can be
restored. It shall be analyzed whether it is normal. If it is suspected that the protection is
misoperation or the signal is abnormal, It can only be put into operation after the cause has been
found out and dealt with.
12.1.6 When the abnormalities or serious defects are found of the protective device in operation,
report to the shift supervisor immediately, decide whether to stop the protection, and contact the
maintenance for treatment.
12.1.7 Any work on the relay protection circuit of the running, backup or maintenance equipment
shall have a work ticket. At the same time, maintenance personnel shall have necessary technical
measures, and do the corresponding safety measures before commencing work. Upon completion of
maintenance, detailed instructions shall be given, and written instructions of "can be put into
operation" from the relay protection staff shall be provided before putting into operation.
12.1.8 The relay protection personnel must be required to bring the new notification or
corresponding drawings for the change of constant value of relay protection or the change of
secondary line; Detailed records shall be kept at the end of the work and a report on any changes
shall be provided in time.
12.2 Inspection Before Relay Protection and Automatic Equipment Operation
12.2.1 There is written declaration of relay protection personnel "available for operation".
12.2.2 Relay protection and automatic device relay, pressure plate, small switch shall be named
correctly and clearly.
12.2.3 There is no abnormal relay, terminal block and wiring, and the protection signal has been
restored.
131
12.2.4 Relay protection and automatic device pressure plate is in correct state when being put into
use or stopped, and small switch is in correct state.
12.3 Inspection during the Operation of Relay Protection and Automatic Device
12.3.1 It is important to check whether the protection platens of equipment and the small valve
switching of the relevant automatic equipment are correct.
12.3.2 The display and alarm indicator of the device panel signal light, power status, LCD screen
are correct without any abnormality.
12.3.3 Secondary wiring, terminal strip, relay, etc. without obvious heating, discoloration, peculiar
smell, breakage phenomenon.
12.4 Relay Protection of Generator-transformer Unit
12.4.1 Overview
12.4.1.1 The protection device of the generator-transformer unit is provided by Nanjing
Nanrui Relay Protection Electric Co., LTD., including three-side panel of PRC85B-31A, B, and C.
The PRC85B-31A and B protection panels are composed of PRC-985B microcomputer-based
generator transformer, CJX outlet relay box and printer, etc. The PRC85B-31C protection panel is
composed of two sets of PCS-974-G transformer non-electricity quantity and auxiliary protection
devices, CJX outlet relay box and printer, etc.
12.4.1.2 PCS-985B of microcomputer generator transformer provides the complete power
protection of the #3A/3B generator transformer unit.
12.4.1.3 PCS-974-G transformer non-electric quantity and auxiliary protection device provide
the non-electricity quantity protection and non-full phase auxiliary protection of generator
transformer unit of #3A/3B.
12.4.1.4 Through the configuration of two PCS-985B protection devices and operation circuit,
the full set of dual protection for primary protection, abnormal operation protection and backup
protection is realized. The two sets of protection devices (including the outlet tripping circuit) are
completely and installed independently in their respective panels without any electrical connection
between them; When one set of protection in operation needs to exit or be overhauled due to
abnormal conditions, the normal operation of the other set of protection will not be affected. The
AC voltage and AC current of each device are taken from the windings of the voltage mutual
inductor and current mutual inductor respectively which are independent from each other. Its
protective range overlaps to avoid dead zones. Each set of protection device is equipped with
complete main protection and backup protection.
12.4.2 Protection Configuration and Outlet Mode of the Generator-transformer Unit Protection
12.4.2.1 There are three types of outlet modes for the generator-transformer protection.
1) "class-A tripping mode": It is used for emergency electrical fault of the generator-
transformer unit, to trip high-voltage side circuit breaker and the de-excitation switch of the
132
generator, to close main steam valve, LV-side branch switch of tripping high-voltage plant
transformer, to start power supply switch used in the plant, to start failure protection of starting, to
start fault recording, and to send the signal of "main protection action" or "backup protection
action" to DCS and remote device.
2) "class-B tripping mode": It is used for non-emergency electric an electrical failure. First
shut the main throttle valve of steam turbine, trip high-voltage side circuit breaker and switch of
generator de-excitation after equally reverse power protection action, trip low-voltage side branch
switch of high voltage plant transformer, start power supply switch (such as station power supply
without switch first), start the fault recording, sent the signal of "main protection action" or "backup
protection action" to DCS and remote devices.
3) "class-C tripping mode": It is used for abnormal operation and system side fault of the
generator-transformer unit, the direct tripping of high-voltage side circuit breaker of the generator-
transformer unit, the operation of generator-transformer unit and system sectionalizing with its own
plant's power. Whether it can be realized is dependent on the configuration of the steam turbine and
steady burning of the boiler.
133
12.4.3 The Generator-transformer Unit Protection Configuration and Outlet Mode
S/N Protection Function Device Outlet Mode

Differential protection of generator-transformer
1 PCS-985B class-A tripping mode
unit
2 Generator Differential Protection PCS-985B class-A tripping mode
3 Differential protection of the main transformer PCS-985B class-A tripping mode
Differential Protection of High Plant
Transformer
5 Differential protection of excitation transformer PCS-985B class-A tripping mode
Symmetric overload protection of generator
6 PCS-985B Signal
(constant time-lag)
7 PCS-985B class-B tripping mode
(inverse time)
(inverse time)
Non-symmetric overload protection of generator
9 PCS-985B Signal
(constant time-lag)
(inverse time)
(inverse time)
Stator grounding protection of injection
generator (fundamental wave)
Stator grounding protection of generator (third
13 PCS-985B Signal
harmonic)
Stator grounding protection of generator (third
harmonic)
One-point grounding protection of generator
15 PCS-985B Signal
rotor
Two-points grounding protection of generator
rotor
17 Interturn protection of generator PCS-985B class-A tripping mode
18 Overvoltage protection of generator PCS-985B class-A tripping mode
Over-excitation protection of generator (constant
19 PCS-985B Signal
time-lag)
Over-excitation protection of generator (inverse
time)
21 Excitation loss of generator (u﹥t1) PCS-985B Signal
22 Excitation loss of generator (U﹤t2) PCS-985B class-A tripping mode
23 Excitation loss of generator (U＞t3) PCS-985B class-A tripping mode
Out-of-step protection of generator (outside
24 PCS-985B Signal
core)
25 Out-of-step protection of generator (inside core) PCS-985B class-A tripping mode
26 Fracture flashover protection of circuit breaker PCS-985B class-A tripping mode
27 Inverse power of generator (t1) PCS-985B Signal
28 Inverse power of generator (t2) PCS-985B class-A tripping mode
29 Program reverse power & main valve closing PCS-985B class-A tripping mode
30 Voltage balance protection PCS-985B Signal
134
Zero-sequence overcurrent II section of main

transformer
Zero-sequence overcurrent I section of main
transformer
The overcurrent protection of excitation
33 PCS-985B Signal
transformer (constant time-lag)
The overcurrent protection of excitation
transformer (inverse time limit)
The overload protection of excitation winding
35 PCS-985B Signal
(constant time-lag)
The overload protection of excitation winding
(inverse time limit)
37 Start-up/shutdown protection PCS-985B class-A tripping mode
38 Inadvertent voltage of generator protection PCS-985B class-A tripping mode
S/N Protection Function Device Outlet Mode
Composite voltage and overcurrent protection of high
plant transformer (t1)
Composite voltage and overcurrent protection of high
plant transformer (t2)
A branch composite voltage and overcurrent
protection of high plant transformer
A branch zero sequence overcurrent protection of
high plant transformer (t1)
A branch zero sequence overcurrent protection of
B branch composite voltage overcurrent protection of
high plant transformer
B branch zero sequence overcurrent protection of
B branch zero sequence overcurrent protection of
47 Light gas of main transformer PCS-974-G Signal
48 Heavy gas of main transformer PCS-974-G class-B tripping mode
49 Pressure release of main transformer PCS-974-G class-B tripping mode
High oil surface temperature of the main transformer
50 PCS-974-G Signal
(low constant value)
High oil surface temperature of the main transformer
51 PCS-974-G Signal
(high constant value)
High winding temperature of the main transformer
52 PCS-974-G Signal
(low constant value)
High winding temperature of the main transformer
53 PCS-974-G Signal
(high constant value)
54 Main transformer oil level PCS-974-G Signal
55 All shutdown of main transformer cooler PCS-974-G Signal
56 Light gas of high plant transformer PCS-974-G Signal
57 Heavy gas of high plant transformer PCS-974-G class-B tripping mode
58 Pressure relief of high plant transformer PCS-974-G class-B tripping mode
59 High oil surface temperature of the high plant PCS-974-G Signal
135
transformer (low constant value)

High oil surface temperature of the high plant
60 PCS-974-G Signal
transformer (high constant value)
High winding temperature of the high plant
61 PCS-974-G Signal
transformer (low constant value)
High winding temperature of the high plant
62 PCS-974-G Signal
transformer (high constant value)
63 Cooler failure of high plant transformer PCS-974-G Signal
High temperature of excitation transformer (low
64 PCS-974-G Signal
constant value)
High temperature of excitation transformer (high
65 PCS-974-G Signal
constant value)
66 Thermal Protection PCS-974-G class-B tripping mode
12.4.4 Special provisions on the generator-transformer unit protection in service and out of service
12.4.4.1 Before the generator is changed to hot standby, the whole set shall be put into the
generator-transformer protection as required.
12.4.4.2 When PT exit or protection device needs to be stopped for some reason, the
corresponding relay protection shall be stopped in advance to avoid mis-operation.
12.4.4.3 When the partial protection device of the generator-transformer unit are stopped, the
influence on other protection devices shall be considered, especially the input-output relationships
between the generator and the main transformer-the plant transformer and the booster station
equipment or the steam turbine system to avoid loss or mis-operation of other equipment protection.
12.4.4.4 The input of tripping pressure plate shall check the protection with no action outlet
signal or device abnormal signals first; When putting the pressure plate, use the high internal
resistance multimeter first to measure the voltage of the non-heteropolarity on both ends of the
pressure plate. Pay attention to the selection of voltage gear, and don't use the resistance or current
gear by mistake. In the measurement, please note that the multimeter shall not touch the metal
enclosure of the protection cabinet and other grounding points, and shall not touch other active
terminals or the shield layer of electronic equipment screen.
12.4.4.5 The pressure plate in service and out of service during the operation of equipment
shall be recorded and explained, and the corresponding local secondary line changes or logical
changes shall be attached when necessary.
12.4.5 LCD Display Description of PCS-985B Protection Device
12.4.5.1 Screen Display Description in the Protection Operation
When the device is in normal operation, the screen display is as Fig. 32-1 Error! Reference
source are not found. As shown.
136
Zone description of constant

Real Time Clock Address 24191 Zone description 01
Differential current of the generator-

HV-side current
Differential current of transformer
HV-side voltage
Differential current of generator
Main wiring of the Differential current of A plant
generator-
Differential current of B plant
Differential current of excitation transformer
Generator Voltage Frequency
Generator current
Output Power
Rotor Voltage
Neutral voltage Grounding resistance of rotor
Fig. 32-1 Screen Display of PCS-985B Protection Operation

12.4.5.2 LCD display description for protection action
When the protection action is taken, the LCD screen displays the latest protection action report
automatically in the following format:
Serial number of
report and action
NO.025 2009-06-01 15:28:03:660 Device action
time
Starting time of 0000ms Protection start
protection
Protect action 0500ms Overcurrent I section action of generator
elements and
Tripping outlet 1 Tripping outlet 2
action time
12.4.5.3 LCD display description for protection abnormality

During the operation of the protection device, when the hardware self-check error or system
operation exception of LCD screen occurs, it will display the latest switch change bit report
automatically. The format is as follows:
Report serial
number and alarm
NO.023 2009-06-01 15:20:03:660 Device action
time
Alarm starts 0000ms Alarm starts recording
recording
message
137
Device self-check alarm information

Abnormal action Terminal CT abnormality of generator
element
12.4.5.4 LCD display description for switch quantity displacement

During the operation of the protection device, when any switch quantity of the LCD screen
displaces, it will display the latest once switch quantity displacement report automatically. The
format is as follows:
Report serial number NO.045 2009-06-01 16:20:03:660 Device

and displacement displacement
time
Open into the Differential protection in service 0->1
displacement element
Note: Switch from showing any report to showing the transformer main wiring diagram by pressing
the 'ESC' key.
12.4.5.5 The signal light of PCS-985B device
1) The "running" light is green. The device lights up when it is running normally, and the
extinguishing indicates that the device is not working;
2) The "TV break" light is yellow, which lights up when the TV is abnormal or broken;
3) The light of "TA breakage" is yellow. It lights up when TA is abnormal or broken or
differential current is abnormal;
4) The "alarm" light is yellow, which lights up when the alarm signal is sent;
5) The light of "tripping” is red, which lights up when protection action is carried out at the
exit, and keeps magnetic; After the protection returns, press the button of "signal reset" or the
remote signal reset before extinguishing.
12.4.6 The Signal Light of PCS - 974-G Device.
138
S/N Indicator light Definition Description

In green, the light turns on when it is running normally, and
1. OP Operation extinguishing indicates that the device is not in working
condition
2. BJ Alarm In yellow, the light turns on when there is abnormality
In red, it is on when the protection action of non-full phase
3. TJ1 Electricity tripping
and in the outlet
Time delay tripping of non- In red, it is on when the time delay protection of non-
4. TJ2
electricity quantity electricity quantity and in the outlet
Non-electrical Main transformer cooler
5.
quantity failure
Overhigh winding
Non-electrical
6. temperature of the main
quantity
transformer
Non-electrical Over-high oil temperature of
7.
quantity main transformer
Non-electrical Three phases are
8.
quantity inconsistent When the joint of external non-electricity quantity
Non-electrical Heavy gas of main signal is closed, the corresponding red signal light is on.
9.
quantity transformer When the device "alarm" lights up, it will go out
Non-electrical Pressure release of main automatically after the abnormal situation disappears.
10. "Electric tripping", "non-electricity time delay tripping",
quantity transformer
"1,2,3...16" and other signal lights will only extinguish
Non-electricity High temperature of after pressing the button of "signal reset" or the remote
11.
quantity 8 excitation transformer signal reset.
Non-electricity Overhigh temperature of
12.
quantity 9 excitation transformer
Non-electricity High oil temperature of main
13.
quantity 14 transformer
Non-electricity Light gas of main
14.
quantity 15 transformer
Non-Electricity Main transformer oil level
15.
Quantity 16 abnormal

In green, the light turns on when it is running
16. OP Operation normally, and extinguishing indicates that the
device is not in working condition
In yellow, the light turns on when there is
17. BJ Alarm
abnormality
In red, it is on when the protection action of non-
18. TJ1 Electricity tripping
full phase and in the outlet
Time delay tripping of non- In red, it is on when the time delay protection of
19. TJ2
electricity quantity non-electricity quantity and in the outlet
Non-electricity quantity Cooler failure of high plantWhen the joint of external non-electricity
20.
1 transformer quantity signal is closed, the corresponding red
Non-electricity quantity Overhigh winding temperature signal light is on.
21.
3 of high plant transformer When the device "alarm" lights up, it will go
out automatically after the abnormal situation
Non-electricity quantity
22. Three phases are inconsistent disappears. "Electric tripping", "non-electricity
4
time delay tripping", "1,2,3...16" and other signal
23. Non-electricity quantity Heavy gas of high plant lights will only extinguish after pressing the
139
5 transformer button of "signal reset" or the remote signal reset.

Non-electricity quantity Pressure relief of high plant
24.
6 transformer
Non-electricity quantity Overhigh oil temperature of high
25.
7 plant transformer
Non-electricity quantity Light gas of high plant
26.
8 transformer
Non-electricity quantity High oil temperature of high
27.
9 plant transformer
Non-electricity quantity High winding oil temperature of
28.
11 high plant transformer
140
12.4.7 Protection Panel Pressure Plate of Generator-transformer Unit

12.4.7.1 Protection Plate of Generator-transformer Unit
1) See the pressure plate of the A, B and C panels of the generator-transformer unit as follows:
S/N Pressing plate name A brief explanation in service and out of service
1. Differential Protection of Main Transformer Input
2. Main transformer HV-side voltage backup Input
3. Main transformer grounding zero sequence Input
4. Differential Protection of High Plant Transformer Input
5. High plant transformer HV-side voltage backup Input
6. A branch backup of high plant transformer Input
7. B branch backup of high plant transformer Input
8. Differential protection of generator-transformer unit Input
9. Generator Differential Protection Input
10. Backup between phase of generator Input
11. Interturn protection of generator Input
Generator stator grounding (fundamental wave zero
12. Input
sequence voltage)
Stator grounding of generator (third harmonic
13. Input
voltage)
14. Generator rotor grounding protection Input
15. Stator symmetrical overload of generator Input
16. Generator stator negative sequence overloading Input
17. Excitation loss protection of generator Input
18. Out-of-Step Protection of Generator Input
19. Overvoltage protection of generator Input
20. Over-excitation protection Input
21. Reverse power protection of generator Input
22. Frequency protection of generator Input
23. False power-on protection of generator Input
24. Start-up/shutdown protection of generator Input
Differential protection of excitation transformer in
25. Input
service
26. Excitation backup protection of generator Input
27. Tripping HV-side switch 1 Input
28. Tripping HV-side switch 2 Input
29. Close the main valve 1 Input
30. Close the main valve 2 Input
31. Tripping de-excitation switch 1 Input
141
32. Tripping de-excitation switch 2 Input
33. Start fails 1 Input
34. Start fails 2 Input
35. A branch of tripping high plant transformer Input
36. The switching of locking A branch Input
37. Start A branch switching Input
38. B branch of tripping high plant transformer Input
39. The switching of locking B branch Input
40. Start B branch switching Input
Note: Backup platens are not listed

2) See the pressure plate of the C panel of the generator- transformer unit protection as follows:
A brief explanation in service and out of

S/N Pressing plate name
service
The non-electricity quantity protection maintenance state of In normal stop, add when one time
1.
main transformer equipment maintenance and debugging
2. Non-full phase protection Input
3. Time delay protection of non-electricity quantity Input
4. Cooler fault starting tripping of main transformer Not input
Winding overtemperature starting tripping of main
5. Input
transformer
Over-high oil temperature starting tripping of main
6. Input
transformer
7. Gas starting tripping of main transformer Input
8. Pressure releasing starting tripping of main transformer Input
Winding high temperature starting tripping of excitation
9. Not input
transformer
Winding overtemperature starting tripping of excitation
10. Not input
transformer
Tripping generator-transformer unit switch 1 of the main
11. Input
transformer non-electricity quantity protection
Tripping generator-transformer unit switch 2 of the main
12. Input
Tripping de-excitation switch 1 of the main transformer non-
13. Input
electricity quantity protection
Tripping de-excitation switch 2 of the main transformer non-
14. Input
The non-electricity quantity protection closing main valve 1
15. Input
of the main transformer
16. Input
of the main transformer
Tripping high plant transformer LV-side switch of the main
17. Input
Starting high plant transformer LV-side switch switching of
18. Input
the main transformer non-electricity quantity protection
142
Tripping high plant transformer A branch of the main

19. Input
Tripping high plant transformer B branch of the main
20. Input
Starting high plant transformer A branch switching of the
21. Input
non-electricity quantity protection
A brief explanation in service and out of

S/N Pressing plate name
service
Starting high plant transformer B branch switching of the
22. Input
non-electricity quantity protection
The non-electricity quantity protection maintenance state of In normal stop, add when one time
23.
plant transformer equipment maintenance and debugging
24. Non-full phase protection Input
25. Time delay protection of non-electricity quantity Input
26. Cooler fault starting tripping of high plant transformer Input
Winding overtemperature starting tripping of high plant
27. Input
transformer
28. Heavy gas starting tripping of high plant transformer Input
29. Pressure releasing starting tripping of high plant transformer Input
30. Overtemperature starting tripping of High plant transformer Input
Tripping generator-transformer unit switch 1 of the plant
31. Input
Tripping generator-transformer unit switch 2 of the plant
32. Input
Tripping de-excitation switch 1 of the plant transformer non-
33. Input
Tripping de-excitation switch 2 of the plant transformer non-
34. Input
35. Input
of plant transformer
36. Input
of plant transformer
Tripping high plant transformer LV-side switch of the plant
37. Input
Starting high plant transformer LV-side switch switching of
38. Input
the plant transformer non-electricity quantity protection
Tripping high plant transformer A branch of the plant
39. Input
transformer non-electricity protection
Tripping high plant transformer B branch of the plant
40. Input
transformer non-electricity protection
Starting high plant transformer A branch switching of the
41. Input
plant transformer non-electricity protection
Starting high plant transformer B branch switching of the
42. Input
plant transformer non-electricity protection
143
12.5 Relay Protection of 150KV Line

12.5.1 There are two kinds of protection of the Indonesia Jeneponto Phase II line: Differential
protection (primary protection) and overcurrent protection (reserve protection)
12.5.2 Line differential protection is realized by 7SC87 protection device. The signal meaning of
LCD display screen of protection device is:
12.5.2.1 7SL87 shortcut key:
1) F1: Operation log
2) F2: Failure log
3) F3: Operation value of line 1
4) F4: Side circuit breaker fundamental wave
5) F5: Medium circuit breaker fundamental wave
6) F6: Access signal
7) F7: Output signal
12.5.2.2 7SL87 LED：
1) LED 1: Tripping phase A, starting phase A is fail, and phase A starting reclosure
TRIP L1, 50BF START L1, AR START L1
2) LED 2: Tripping phase B, starting phase B is fail, and phase B starting reclosure
3) LED 3: Tripping phase C, starting phase C is fail, and phase C starting reclosure
4) LED 4: Line differential protection action
87L TRIP
5) LED 5: Tripping phase ABC, starting phase ABC is fail, and starting three-phase reclosure
TRIP L1L2L3, 50BF START L1L2L3, AR START 3P
6) LED 6: Tripping phase ABC, starting phase ABC is fail, and locking reclosure
TRIP L1L2L3, 50BF START L1L2L3, BLOCK AR
7) LED 7: Backup overcurrent protection action
BACKUP 0/C TRIP
8) LED 8: PI data failure
PI data fault
9) LED 9: Fiber channel fault
144
87L CHANNEL FAULT

10) LED 10: Exit differential protection
PROTECTION BLOCKED
11) LED 11: Side CT breakage (5B4)
TA1 CT Broken wire
12) LED 12: Middle CT breakage (5AB4)
TA2 CT Broken wire
13) LED 13: Lateral differential tripping
REMOTE 87L TRIP
14) LED 14: Differential starting
87L PICKUP
15) LED 15: The air switch of line PT opening position
Line VT MCB TRIP
16) LED 16: Far tripping (Offside of line)
DTT TRIP
12.5.3 Line overcurrent protection is realized by 7SJ64 protection device. Set two constant time-
lags and an inverse time section, both of which have surge brake elements. The conditions of them
are that: The harmonic component is greater than the setting value component; The current shall not
exceed the upper limit value; The setting value of a surge brake element is exceeded. Inrush restrain
action, protection will not exit tripping signal. If the current detected by the protection device
exceeds the set value and there is no inrush restrain element action, then the protection will exit
tripping after the time delay.
12.5.4 The meaning of LCD display screen indicator with line backup protection:
12.5.4.1 "50-1 TRIP": Line overcurrent protection action.
12.5.4.2 "50N-1 TRIP": Line zero sequence overcurrent protection action.
12.5.4.3 "VT brk. wire": PT breakage alarm
12.5.4.4 "S12 MCB TRIP": Alarm only when the air switch of the protection cabinet power
supply and the air switch air of the line side PT are disconnected at the same time.
12.5.4.5 "50-2 TRIP": Line overcurrent (the second section) protection action.
12.5.4.6 Line protection platen input
Pressure plate
S/N English Chinese Input
number
Main protection A phase tripping
1 L101 MAIN PROTECTION TRIP L1 Input
outlet
145
Main protection B phase tripping

outlet
Main protection C phase tripping
outlet
The permanent tripping output of
4 L104 MAIN PROTECTION TRIP 3P Input
main protection
BACKUP PROTECTION TRIP Backup Protection A Phase
5 L105 Input
L1 Tripping Outlet
BACKUP PROTECTION TRIP Backup protection B phase tripping
6 L106 Input
L2 outlet
BACKUP PROTECTION TRIP Backup protection C phase tripping
7 L107 Input
L3 outlet
BACKUP PROTECTION TRIP The permanent tripping output of
8 L108 Input
3P backup protection
9 L109 50BF START L1 Start A phase fails Input
10 L110 50BF START L2 Start B phase fails Input
11 L111 50BF START L3 Start C Phase Fails Input
12 L112 AR START L1 Phase A starts reclosure Not input
13 L113 AR START L2 Phase B starts reclosure Not input
Pressure plate
number
14 L114 AR START L3 Phase C starts reclosure Not input
15 L115 AR START 3P Starts three-phase reclosure Not input
DDT receiving message tripping
16 L116 DDT Input
5B4 (5B6) TC2
Main protection A phase tripping
outlet
Main protection B phase tripping
outlet
Main protection C phase tripping
outlet
The permanent tripping output of
20 L120 MAIN PROTECTION TRIP 3P Input
main protection
BACKUP PROTECTION TRIP Backup Protection A Phase
21 L121 Input
L1 Tripping Outlet
BACKUP PROTECTION TRIP Backup protection B phase tripping
22 L122 Input
L2 outlet
BACKUP PROTECTION TRIP Backup protection C phase tripping
23 L123 Input
L3 outlet
BACKUP PROTECTION TRIP The permanent tripping output of
24 L124 Input
3P backup protection
25 L125L 50BF START L1 Start A phase fails Input
26 L126 50BF START L2 Start B phase fails Input
27 L127 50BF START L3 Start C Phase Fails Input
28 L128 AR START L1 Phase A starts reclosure Not input
29 L129 AR START L2 Phase B starts reclosure Not input
30 L130 AR START L3 Phase C starts reclosure Not input
146
31 L131 AR START 3P Starts three-phase reclosure Not input

DDT receiving tripping 5AB4
32 L132 DDT Input
(5AB6) TC2
12.6 Start-up/standby transformer of #2 Relay Protection
12.6.1 Overview
12.6.1.1 The protection device of the start-up/backup transformer is provided by Nanjing
Nanrui Relay Protection Electric Co., LTD., including three-side panels of PRC985T-26A, B, and C.
Of which, PRC85T-22A protection panel is composed of protection device of PCS-985T
transformer, non-electricity quantity and auxiliary protection device of PCS-974, CJX outlet relay
box and printer. The PRC85T-22B protection screen is composed of PCS-985T transformer
protection device and the PRC85T-22C protection panel is composed of printer and RCS-9698
communication device.
12.6.1.2 The protection device of PCS-985T transformer provides all the electric quantity
protection of the start-up/standby transformer.
12.6.1.3 PCS-974-G non-electric quantity and auxiliary protection device of transformer
provide auxiliary protection such as non-electric quantity protection, non-full phase protection of
the start-up/backup transformer and failure protection.
12.6.1.4 Through the configuration of two PCS-985T protection devices and operation circuit,
the full set of dual protection for primary protection and abnormal operation protection of start-
up/standby transformer and backup protection is realized. The two sets of protection devices
(including the outlet tripping circuit) are installed completely and independently in their respective
screens without any electrical connection between them; When one set of protection in operation
needs to exit or be overhauled due to abnormal conditions, the normal operation of the other set of
protection will not be affected. The AC voltage and AC current of each device are taken from the
windings of the voltage mutual inductor and current mutual inductor respectively which are
independent from each other. Its protective range overlaps to avoid dead zones. Each set of
protection device is equipped with complete main protection and backup protection.
12.6.2 Start-up/standby transformer Protection Configuration and its Action Outlet
12.6.2.1 The Protection Configuration of Start-up/backup Transformer A, B Panel
Tripping Tripping HV
Protection name Control word Tripping 5A5 Start failure Matrix input
5AB5 side
Differential protection 1F87 1 1 1 1 1
Backup between HV-side
phase
Overcurrent section I 1F87 1 1 1 1 1
Overcurrent section II 1F87 1 1 1 1 1
HV-side grounding
protection
The first time limit of zero
0009 0 0 0 0 1
sequence I section
147
The second time limit of

1F87 1 1 1 1 1
zero sequence I section
The first time limit of zero
1F87 1 1 1 1 1
sequence II section
The second time limit of
1F83 1 1 0 1 1
zero sequence II section
Zero sequence III section 1F83 1 1 0 1 1
Backup A-branch voltage
overcurrent
Overcurrent section I 0081 0 1 0 0 1
Overcurrent section II 0081 0 1 0 0 1
Backup B-branch voltage
overcurrent
Overcurrent section I 0401 0 0 0 0 1
Overcurrent section II 0401 0 0 0 0 1
Branch zero sequence
protection
A-branch zero sequence
0381 1 0 0 0 1
overcurrent I section
A-branch zero sequence
1F83 1 0 0 1 1
overcurrent II section
Tripping Tripping HV
Protection name Control word Tripping 5A5 Start failure Matrix input
5AB5 side
B-branch zero sequence
1C01 0 1 0 0 1
overcurrent I section
B-Branch Zero Sequence
1F83 0 1 0 1 1
Overcurrent II Section
The start-up/standby transformer each side circuit breaker of

Heavy gas of body
instantaneous action jumps
Light gas of body Signaling
Heavy gas of load pressure regulating
Light gas of load pressure regulating Signaling
Pressure relief valve of body
Pressure relief valve of load pressure regulating
Full-stop of cooler Signaling
Upper oil temperature T75℃ Signaling
Winding temperature T100℃ Signaling
Upper oil temperature T55℃ Start cooler
Upper oil temperature T45℃ Stop cooler
Note: The protection outlet of non-electricity quantity is realized through hard wiring.
148
12.6.3, Operation State of Protection Device

12.6.3.1 The signal light of RCS-985T device
The "run" light is green. The device lights up when it is running normally, and the
extinguishing indicates that the device is not working;
The "TV breakage" light is yellow, which lights up when the TV is abnormal or broken;
The light of "TA breakage" is yellow. It lights up when TA is abnormal or broken or
differential current is abnormal;
The "alarm" light is yellow, which lights up when the alarm signal is sent;
The "tripping" lamp is red. It will light up when the protection action is performed and exits,
and it will keep itself; After the protection returns, press the button of "signal reset" or the remote
signal reset before extinguishing.
12.6.3.2 The signal light of RCS-974AG device is as the following table:

Operation In green, the light turns on when it is running normally, and
1. OP extinguishing indicates that the device is not in working
condition
2. BJ Alarm In yellow, the light turns on when there is abnormality
Electricity tripping In red, it is on when the protection action of non-full phase
3. TJ1
and in the outlet
Time delay tripping of In red, it is on when the time delay protection of non-
4. TJ2
non-electricity quantity electricity quantity and in the outlet
149
5. Non-electricity Backup
quantity 1
quantity 2
quantity 3
quantity 4
9. Non-electricity Heavy gas of body
quantity 5
10. Non-electricity Heavy gas of pressure
quantity 6 regulating
11. Non-electricity Winding
quantity 7 Overtemperature When the joint of external non-electricity quantity
signal is closed, the corresponding red signal light is on.
12. Non-electricity Pressure relief of When the device "alarm" lights up, it will go out
quantity 8 body pressure automatically after the abnormal situation disappears.
13. Non-electricity Pressure relief of "Electric tripping", "non-electricity time delay tripping",
quantity 9 pressure regulating "1,2,3...16" and other signal lights will only extinguish
after pressing the button of "signal reset" or the remote
14. Non-electricity Backup signal reset.
quantity 10
quantity 11
quantity 12
quantity 13
quantity 14
quantity 15
20. Non-Electricity Backup
Quantity 16
12.6.4 CZX-12R1 Operates the Signal Light of Relay Device

12.6.4.1 The three "OP" lights on the left side are the first set of three-phase loop monitoring
lights of tripping coil A, B and C respectively. When the switch is switched on, the light is on.
12.6.4.2 The "TA", "TB" and "TC" lights on the left side are the first set of three-phase
tripping lights of circuit A, B and C respectively.
12.6.4.3 “CH” light is the signal lamp for switching reclosure.
12.6.4.4 The three "OP" lights on the right side are the second set of three-phase circuit
monitoring lights of tripping coil A, B and C respectively. When the switch is switched on, the light
is on.
12.6.4.5 The "TA", "TB" and "TC" lights on the right side are the second set of three-phase
tripping lights of circuit A, B and C respectively.
12.6.4.6 That the "L1" light is on means the AC voltage is taken from the 150KV busbar.
150
12.6.5 Equipment Locking and Alarm

12.6.5.1 When the CPU detects the hardware failure of the device itself, it sends the locking
signal of the device and lock the whole set of protection. Hardware failures include: RAM
exception, program memory error, EEPROM error, invalid constant value, optoelectronic isolation
power failure alarm, DSP error and tripping outlet exception, etc. The device shall be exited.
12.6.5.2 When the CPU detects that the device starts for a long time, does not correspond to
start, the internal communication of the device is wrong, TA breakage, TV breakage, and protection
alarm signals, and the alarm signal of protection, sent the alarm signal of the device. At this point
the device can continue to work.
12.6.6 Record on Operation of Protection Device
12.6.6.1 In normal operation, the differential current, current and voltage can be monitored
from the main menu; If the detailed sampling data is required, check each sample value by entering
the protection state, or print the normal waveform.
12.6.6.2 When the protection device action trips, the "tripping" light shall be on, be
maintained itself at this time, and press the button of "print" on the screen to print the report in time.
Enter the device menu to print the related waveform report, then press the button of "reset" on the
screen for signal resetting after recording the device's action signal accurately.
12.6.6.3 When the protection device "alarm" or "TA breakage" light is on, "TV breakage"
light is on, and "operation" light is on, there is an abnormality on the LCD screen of protection
device, an alarm signal is sent, check the current voltage according to the signal type, and print the
event message; If the signal is sent by the protection, check the AC input and input of the device,
analyze the cause and solve the problem.
12.6.6.4 That the "alarm" light of protection device is on and the light of "run" goes out
indicates that there are device self-checking problems (EPROM, RAM, VFC, EEPROM, etc.). After
unfastening the output tripping pressure plate on the protection panel, replacing the relevant
components (plug-in) and troubleshooting, reboot the protection device, power on again, and cast
the output tripping pressure plate on protection screen after confirming that device back to normal.
12.6.7 Analysis of Protection Device Action
12.6.7.1 In normal operation, when the unit is abnormal, the corresponding protection sends
an alarm signal, and the current waveform can be printed. If the abnormality disappears, the
protection delay returns, and the protection device will record the protection alarming time and
returning time.
12.6.7.2 When the unit device fault occurs, trip for protection action, record the waveform
during the fault and analyze the action of the protection device by printing the waveform.
12.6.8 See the pressure plate of the A, B and C panels of the start-up/backup transformer
protection as follows
151
1. Differential protection in service Add in normal state

2. Putting backup between HV-side phase Add in normal state
3. Putting grounding zero sequence of
Add in normal state
HV-side phase
4. Putting grounding non-zero sequence
Not input
of HV-side phase
5. Input over-excitation Not input
6. Input A-branch backup Add in normal state
7. Input B-branch backup Add in normal state
8. Input A-branch zero sequence Add in normal state
9. Input B-branch zero sequence Add in normal state
10. Tripping HV-side switch 1 Add in normal state
11. Tripping HV-side switch 2 Add in normal state
12. Tripping A branch Add in normal state
13. Tripping B branch Add in normal state
14. Tripping A branch standby Add in normal state
15. Tripping B branch standby Add in normal state
16. Maintenance Condition In normal stop, add it when one time equipment maintenance
(debugging)
17. Non-complete protection Not input
18. Time delay protection of non-
Not input
electricity quantity in service
19. Cooler Fault Starting Tripping Not input
20. Winding overtemperature starting
Not input
tripping
21. Proper Re-Gas Starting Tripping Add in normal state
22. On-load voltage regulated re-gas
Add in normal state
starting tripping
23. Proper pressure releasing starting
Add in normal state
tripping
24. Voltage-regulated pressure releasing
Add in normal state
starting tripping
25. Tripping HV-side switch 1 of non-full
Not input
phase I section
26. Tripping HV-side switch 2 of non-full
Not input
phase I section
27. Tripping HV-side switch 1-1 of non-
Add in normal state
28. Tripping HV-side switch 1-2 of non-
Add in normal state
29. Tripping A branch of the non-
Add in normal state
30. Tripping B branch of the non-
Add in normal state
152
12.7 150KV Busbar Protection

12.7.1 The busbar protection of the Indonesia Jeneponto phase II of adopts CSC-150CN busbar
difference protection device of Beijing Sifang Company. It is the current differential protection of
split phase fast virtual phase comparison and the current mutation protection of ratio brake.
12.7.2 Protection principle: When busbar fails beyond the normal work or its scope of protection,
the sum of all current flow in and out of the busbar is zero (differential current is zero), and if it fails
within the scope of protection, the sum of all current flow in and out of the busbar is not zero
(differential current is not zero). The differential protection will judge and distinguish between
busbar internal faults and external faults based on the principle. At the same time, in order to speed
up the action speed of differential protection and improve the sensitivity of differential protection of
conventional ratio brake in heavy load, high-resistance grounding and system power angle swing,
the current mutation protection of virtual phase comparison and current differential protection of
ratio brake are adopted. Current mutational volume protection of virtual phase comparison is also
according to the sum of the positive mutation of all branch current at the moment of fault, it is the
inflow current of the busbar. The sum of negative mutation current is the outflow current of the
busbar. The sum of the virtual current of the busbar is zero when the fault occurs beyond the zone
and the sum of the virtual current of the busbar is not zero when the fault occurs inside the zone.
12.7.3 In order to prevent the busbar differential protection from misoperation, the protection
device adopts compound voltage locking, which is composed of low voltage, zero sequence voltage
and negative sequence voltage criterion. When any criterion meets the action condition, that is the
differential protection of action locking.
12.7.4 In order to prevent the differential protection of CT saturation from misoperation, the
protection device is equipped with the detection element of CT saturation to prevent the busbar
protection from misoperation due to the differential current of CT severe saturation when the fault
occurs beyond the area near the busbar. The principle is to set up the detection element of CT
saturation according to the characteristics of the secondary current wave after the occurrence of CT
saturation to distinguish the fault of CT saturation and the inside the busbar area.
12.7.5 There are 8 indicators on the LCD panel of the protection device, which are "protection
operation", "busbar difference action", "malfunction action", "busbar linkage action", "AC
abnormality", "interconnection operation", "position anomaly" and "alarm" respectively.
12.7.5.1 "Protect run": Normal operation is green, and it flashes when there is protection
starting.
12.7.5.2 "Busbar difference action": When the light is not on during normal operation, red
light is on after protection.
12.7.5.3 "Malfunction": When the light is not on during normal operation, red light will be on
after protection action.
12.7.5.4 "Busbar-linkage": When the light is not on during normal operation, red light will be
on after protection action.
153
12.7.5.5 "AC abnormal": The light is not on during normal operation, and red light is on
when CT and PT breakage.
12.7.5.6 "Interconnection operation": The light is not on when the busbar is running normally,
and it turns green when the busbar is in interconnection.
12.7.5.7 "Position abnormal": The light is not on during normal operation, and the red light is
on when the position of isolation switch is abnormal.
12.7.5.8 "Alarm": The light is not on during normal operation, and red light is on when the
device fails and the operation is abnormal. When the device failure alarms, red light flashes,
positive power of protection outlet is locked and all protection functions are removed; When
abnormal operation alarms, alarm red light is always on, and do not lock the positive power of
protection outlet.
12.7.6 The pressure plate of differential protection is in series mode of both soft and hard. After the
soft pressure plate, hard pressure plate of differential protection and differential protection control
word are input, the differential protection is input. The shunt tripping plate of side-switch
malfunction is also a soft/hard series mode. After the protection soft pressure plate, hard protection
plate and control word of side-switch malfunction shunt tripping are input, input the shunt tripping
protection of side-switch malfunction.
12.7.7 Bus Protection Input
12.7.7.1 I and II Input status of busbar differential protection (group 1 and group 2 are the
same)
Pressure plate
number
1 1C1LP1 TRIP 5A4(5B4) Trip 5A4 (5B4) circuit breaker Input
2 1C1LP2 CBF 5A4(5B4) Start failure 5A4 (5B4) Not input
3 1C2LP1 TRIP 5A5(5AB5) Trip 5A5 (5AB5) circuit breaker Input
4 1C2LP2 CBF 5A5(5AB5) Start failure 5A5 (5AB5) Not input
5 1C3LP1 TRIP 5A6(5B6) Trip 5A6 (5B6) circuit breaker Input
6 1C3LP2 CBF 5A6(5B6) Start failure 5A6 (5B6) Not input
7 1C4LP1 Spare Backup Not input
17 1KLP2 Relay test Maintenance status input Not input
12.8 Relay Protection of Power Plant System
154
12.8.1 6KV incoming line protection is realized by the high plant transformer or start-up/backup
transformer protection device; The 6KV feeder protection consists of quick breakage, overcurrent
and zero sequence overcurrent protection.
12.8.2 6KV low plant transformer consists of speed break, overcurrent, zero sequence overcurrent
of high and low voltage, overload and coil winding temperature; The protection of 6KV motor used
in the plant consists of differential, overloading, quick break, overcurrent and low voltage
protection.
12.9 Power Fast Switching Equipment Used in the Plant
12.9.1 Overview of Power Fast Switching Equipment Used in the Plant
12.9.1.1 Description on device panel
1) The device panel is composed of LCD screen, operation key, indicator light and 232
communication interface, etc..
2) With the keyboard, the LCD can display the measured value (including displaying voltage,
current, frequency, frequency difference, phase difference, switch position, etc.), function in service
and out of service, constant value setting, manual switch operation, event recall, printing and other
operations.
12.9.1.2 Indicator light on the device panel
1) Operation: When the device is in normal operation state, it will shine three times per second,
and once every two seconds when it is in closed state.
2) On-site: When the light is on, the manual switch operation can only be done on-site.
Otherwise, the manual switching operation can only be operated in the distance.
3) Work: When the switch of working power supply is closed, the light turns on.
4) Standby: When the switch of standby power supply is closed, the light turns on.
5) Action: It indicates that the device has just been switched. It goes out after resetting.
6) Locking: It indicates that the device is in the state of locking, including device locking and
outlet locking.
7) Communication 1: Communication transmission light. Used for devices to communicate
with DCS and portable computers.
8) Communication 2: Communication transmission light. Used for devices to communicate
with DCS and portable computers.
12.9.1.3 Operation key on device panel
1) ↑, ↓: Move the menu up and down or scroll the screen.
2) ←, →: Move the constant parameter bit or select the recalling event.
3) +, -: When modifying a constant parameter, increase or decrease the number.
155
4) Exit: It is used to return to the previous menu page or cancel the operation.
5) Confirm: It is used to enter the next menu page or confirm the operation.
6) Reset: Press briefly and restore for resetting control, alarm, and light signal.
12.9.1.4 Switch normally
Normal switching is started manually and can be carried out on DCS system or device panel.
Normal switching is bidirectional, which can be switched from the working power supply to the
standby power, or from the standby power to the working power supply. Normal switching can be
done in the following ways:
1) Parallel switching
Parallel automatic: Start manually. If the parallel switching conditions are met, the device will
close the standby (working) switch first and then switch off the working (standby) switch
automatically after a certain delay. If the standby (working) switch that has just closed is switched
off during this delay, the device will no longer switch off (standby) automatically. If the condition
of parallel switching is not satisfied after starting, the device will lock the message and enter the
waiting for resetting state.
Parallel semi-automatic: Start manually. If the condition of parallel switch is met, close the standby
(work) switch, and the operation of the tripping (standby) switch is completed manually. If the
operator fails to trip (standby) within the specified time, the device will send an alarming signal. If
the condition of parallel switching is not satisfied after starting, the device will lock and send
message and enter the waiting for resetting state.
2) Normal simultaneous switching
Start manually, send the tripping command of the work (standby) switch first. Switch the
standby (work) switch command when the switching conditions are met. To guarantee first break
then close, add certain delay before the command of closing.
There are three switching conditions for normal simultaneous switching: Fast, simultaneous capture,
and residual voltage. If the fast switching is not successful, transfer to simultaneous capture or
residual voltage switch automatically.
12.9.1.5 Accident switching
The emergency switch is started by the protection outlet, one-way, and can only be switched
from the working power supply to the standby power. Accident switching can be done in two ways:
Accident series switching. To start protect, trip the working power supply switch first. Close the
standby power after it is confirmed that the working switch has tripped and the switching conditions
are satisfied. There are three switching conditions for series switching: Fast, simultaneous capture,
and residual voltage.
Accident simultaneous switching. To start protect, send the command of tripping the working
power supply switch first. Close the command of standby power after the switching conditions are
156
satisfied (or delayed by users). There are three switching conditions for the accident simultaneous
switching: Fast, simultaneous capture, and residual voltage.
12.9.1.6 Abnormal switching
If the switch is abnormal, it will start by itself after being detected by the device. It is one-way
and can only be switched from the working power supply to the standby power. Abnormal
situations refer to the following two situations:
1) Loss power of busbar used in the plant When the three-phase voltage of the busbar used in
the plant are all lower than the setting value and the time exceeds the setting delay, the device will
be connected in series or switched simultaneously according to the selected mode. Switching
condition: Residual voltage.
2) Wrong switching tripping of working power supply. The device will close the standby
power switch when switching conditions are met and the working power supply is tripped due to
various reasons (including human error operation). Switching conditions: Fast, simultaneous
capture, and residual voltage.
12.9.2 Locking Alarm, Fault Processing Function
The device has the function of locking alarm and fault processing, in which the locking
structure is shown as follows:
PT separate switch
opening
Position locking Switch full closing
Switch full opening

Device is
Locking A (cannot be reset abnormal
AD, EEPROM, RAM,
automatically) can inquire
CPU, etc.
in the "report of
abnormality"
Protection Locking
PT breakage
Backup loses
power
External outlet locking
Locking B (can be reset

Outlet is quitted in "mode
automatically) "report of Outlet locking setting"
abnormality" displays
"outlet locking"
All switching modes are quitted

Fast switching/residual voltage
Normal closing time
Normal closing phase angle
12.9.2.1 Related to the above locking structure, relevant signals in the central control signal
are defined as follows:
1) Device locking: Any one of the locking A is satisfied, or after the device operates once.
2) Outlet locking: Any one of the locking B is satisfied.
3) Open position abnormality: Any of the three conditions of position locking is satisfied.
4) Device abnormality: device abnormality in the same locking A.
157
12.9.2.2 The "lock" light in the panel will light up if:

1) After the device operates once.
2) There is locking A.
3) There is locking B.
12.9.2.3 Abnormal switch position (position locking/de-coupling)
1) One of the necessary conditions for starting and switching of the device is that one of the
standby switches is closed and the other switch is opened. Meanwhile, the PT isolation switch must
be closed. If this condition is found not to be satisfied during normal monitoring (except the wrong
tripping of the working switch), the lock the outlet, send the central control signal to the "device
locking" and enter the waiting for resetting state.
2) In addition, if it is found that the switch of the tripping is not switched off or the switch is
not closed within a certain period of time during the switching process, the device will process the
switch respectively according to different switching modes and give the abnormal position locking
signal. For example, in simultaneous switching or parallel switching, if the switch does not trip, two
power sources will be parallel. At this time, the device will perform the function of de-coupling and
trip the switch that is just closed.
12.9.2.4 Device abnormality
After the device is put into operation, some important parts, such as CPU, RAM, EEPROM, AD,
etc. are always checked by themselves. In case of failure, a central control signal of "device
abnormal" will be sent and enter the waiting for resetting state.
12.9.2.5 Protection Locking
The protection locking is the external input. In some protection actions (such as branch
overcurrent, busbar difference, etc.), the idle contact given by these protection can lock the device
to prevent the standby power from being put into the fault busbar. And the device will give the
"Protection Locking" signal and enter the waiting resetting state.
Device waiting for resetting is a running state, rather than a central control signal. As long as
the device sends the signal of "device locking", the device must enter the waiting for resetting state.
Under the waiting for resetting state, the device cannot be switched. It must be restored manually
and there is no condition causing the device to lock. Then the device can enter the running state and
be switched again.
12.9.2.6 PT breakage
When one phase or two phase of the busbar PT used in the plant breaks, the device will lock
for alarm and enter the waiting for resetting state.
12.9.2.7 Backup power loss monitoring
158
If the standby power is lost when the working power supply is input or the standby power is
lost when the working power supply is input, the switching operation cannot be carried out, and the
device will give an alarm signal to enter the waiting for resetting state.
Considering the situation of PT repair of standby section, you can select the function in
service and out of service in the "mode setting" menu. After the "backup power loss locking"
function is out, the residual voltage switch can also be realized under the condition of PT
maintenance.
12.9.2.8 Device locking (waiting for resetting state)
This is a general signal. After the condition of locking A is met or a switch is made, the device will
lock itself and enter the waiting for resetting state. Under this state, it will not respond to any
external operation and starting signal and can only be manually reset to remove. The signal cannot
be reset if a lock or fault still resists.
12.9.2.9 Outlet Locking
When one of the following three conditions occurs, the device will give the central control signal of
"outlet locking" to alarm the operators. The outlet locking can be in service and out of service
repeatedly without manual resetting. When the outlet is locked, the device does not enter the state of
waiting for resetting. Once these three conditions are not met, the device will be put into operation
automatically:
1) Set the outlet in service and out of service in the menu as "exit".
2) The input of external "Outlet Locking" has locking input.
3) The fast switching of device, the normal closing phase angle, the normal closing time and
the residual voltage switching are all set as "quit".
12.9.2.10 Device loses power
Any power loss of +5V, ±15V, +24V of the switch power output of the device will lead to abnormal
operation. The special voltage monitoring circuit will be set up, and the alarm will be given once
the power is lost. This function is independent of CPU.
12.10 Synchronizing Device
12.10.1 Overview
12.10.1.1 Synchronous point setting has 150kV switch of generator-transformer unit, and
150KV line switch.
12.10.1.2 The synchronizing system adopts the single-phase synchronizing mode, which
connects the normal operation and fault alarm signals of the automatic quasi-synchronizing device
to DCS. The synchronizing device adopts the national SID-2FY intelligent reuse type synchronizing
device.
12.10.2 Synchronizing parallel must satisfy the following conditions:
159
12.10.2.1 The values of system voltage to be parallel and system voltage are equal and the
maximum error value shall be within 10%.
12.10.2.2 The cycles of the system to be parallel and system are equal and the allowable
difference is 0.2~0.5HZ.
12.10.2.3 The voltage phases of the system waiting to be parallel are the same.
12.10.2.4 The phase sequences of the system to be parallel and the system are the same.
12.10.3 When the generator is synchronizing parallel, it is not allowed to be parallel if one of
the following situations occurs:
12.10.3.1 The synchronous-meter indicator shakes, does not move, or swings back and forth
quickly.
12.10.3.2 The synchronous-meter indicator does not operate in accordance with the action of
locking relay on the same period.
12.10.3.3 If the state selected at the time of juxtaposition is inconsistent with the state
displayed after power transmission or the time of power on the device in the corresponding period
exceeds the specified time, the device shall exit immediately.
12.10.4 Matters needing attention when the generator is parallel:
12.10.4.1 The synchronous meter is not allowed to energize for too long, usually no more than
10min.
12.10.4.2 For MZ10 synchronous meter, the manual quasi-synchronous switch shall be
concerned to the "test" position first, and the motor cycle wave and voltage adjustment shall be
consistent with the system basically before switching to the "input" position.
12.10.4.3 When returning to the main switch, the simultaneous switch shall be disconnected
first.
12.10.5 DCS automatic quasi-synchronizing device operation procedures of WX-98F
microcomputer
When the voltage and speed of the generator to be wound up to the rated value, it shall be
operated in the following order:
12.10.5.1 Input the AC/DC power supply switch on the same period panel during the
protection.
12.10.5.2 Input automatic simultaneous switch DTK to "DCS" position.
12.10.5.3 Click "simultaneous power transmission" on DCS interface.
12.10.5.4 Click "choose simultaneous switch" on DCS interface.
12.10.5.5 Click "DEH permissible" on DCS interface.
12.10.5.6 Click "simultaneous start-up" on DCS interface.
160
12.10.5.7 Click "outlet control of closing" on DCS interface.

12.10.5.8 Check that the simultaneous switch is in closed.
Note: To carry out "closing of simultaneous no locking ", you can add "click selection without
pressure" on DCS interface after the article 5 above. And delete article 6.
12.10.6 Parallel generator of manual and automatic quasi-synchronous device shall be
carried out as follows:
protection.
12.10.6.2 Input automatic simultaneous switch DTK to "manual control" position.
12.10.6.3 Switch 1TK to "Input" on the same period panel during the protection.
12.10.6.4 Click "DEH permissible" on the DCS interface.
12.10.6.5 Press the QA start button on the same period panel during the protection.
12.10.6.6 Input the CK outlet switch on the same period panel during the protection.
12.10.6.7 Check that the simultaneous switch is closed.
12.10.6.8 Switch the CK outlet switch to the position of "Exit" on the same period panel
during the protection.
12.10.6.9 Switch 1TK to "Exit" on the same period panel during the protection.
Note: If "closing with unlocking on the same period" is carried out, the article 5 above shall be
changed to "Switch WK switch to input on the same period panel during the protection".
12.10.7 The generator of manual quasi-synchronous parallel shall follow the following steps:
protection.
12.10.7.2 Input automatic simultaneous switch DTK to "manual control" position.
12.10.7.3 Switch 1TK to "Input" on the same period panel during the protection.
12.10.7.4 Switch 1STK to "rough adjustment" on the same period panel during the protection.
12.10.7.5 Adjust the voltage, frequency of generator in the range of rated value by SM and SV.
12.10.7.6 Switch 1STK to "fine adjustment" on the same period panel during the protection.
12.10.7.7 Adjust the voltage, frequency of generator is consistent with the system by SM and
SV.
12.10.7.8 The synchronous-meter indicator of the generator rotates slowly clockwise, and
press the HA button on the same period panel during the protection. When the synchronous-meter
indicator is close to the "red line", close the switch immediately.
12.10.7.9 Check that the simultaneous switch is closed.
161
12.10.7.10 Switch 1STK to "Exit" on the same period panel during the protection.
12.10.7.11 Switch 1TK to "Exit" on the same period panel during the protection.
Note: If the "closing with no locking during the same period" is carried out, STK shall be switched
to "remove" according to the article 6 above, delete articles 7 and 8, and add "press HA button on
the same period panel during the protection".
13 Basic Principles of Switching Operation and Accident Handling
13.1 General Principles of Operation
13.1.1 In the process of performing the operation tasks, the personnel on duty must perform their
duties earnestly, carry out the relevant regulations strictly such as operation monitoring and
recitation, etc., so as to ensure the correct and prompt operation.
13.1.1.1 Electrical equipment has four states generally:
Operation state: It refers to that the disconnector (disconnecting switch) and switch of the
electrical equipment are at the circuit has been connected and the equipment is put into operation.
Hot standby state: It refers to the location of the disconnector (isolation switch) of the
electrical equipment is at the closing position. The circuit is disconnected by the switch. Once the
switch is closed, it will be switched to the running state.
Cold standby state: It refers to the disconnector (isolation switch) and switch of the electrical
equipment are both at the disconnection position.
Maintenance status: It shall mean that the disconnectors (isolation switches) and switches of
the electrical equipment are at the disconnection position, and the grounding wire (closing the
grounding disconnector) has been installed and other safety measures have been taken.
13.1.1.2 After the completion of equipment maintenance, the completion procedures of work
termination and work tickets shall be performed in accordance with The Safety Working
Regulations of the Electrical Industry and relevant management standards of the Project Department.
When the power transmission is resumed, careful and detailed inspection shall be carried out on the
circuit of the equipment to be restored. The integrity of the circuit shall be checked. The equipment
shall be cleaned without debris, forgotten tools, grounding wire, short route and meet the operating
conditions.
13.1.1.3 Equipment under the jurisdiction of operation must have written or oral order before
operation. The issuance of operation orders shall, in accordance with the requirements for ensuring
safe and economic operation and the requirements for maintenance work, publish the operation
tasks within the jurisdiction. The equipment under the control of the dispatch must contact the
dispatch in advance, and the operation can be carried out only after the consent of the dispatch
watchman and the order of operation (emergency can be handled before reporting).
The sources of operation commands are:
1) Scheduling command;
162
2) The command from the shift supervisor;

3) The power cut and power transmission notice of equipment
13.1.1.4 Before power transmission, the equipment shall be checked according to the
scheduling command or relevant regulations of operation procedures, and the protective platen that
needs to be put into operation shall be input. There needs to be informed or repaired by the relay
protection personnel in case of any change of protection.
13.1.1.5 The operation fuse and the secondary voltage circuit fuse for instrument and
protection shall be put on or the air switch shall be closed before the equipment is powered.
13.1.1.6 All switching operations shall strictly comply with The Safety Working Procedures
of the Electrical Industry and the relevant provisions of The Operation Ticket Management
Standards of the Project Department.
13.1.1.7 The normal operation of switching shall be avoided as far as possible in the
situations where the operator turns over, the system peak load, the system connection is abnormal,
the power flow of the transmission line exceeds the stable limit and the inclement weather
conditions.
13.1.2 Basic Operating Principles and Requirements
13.1.2.1 Operation of transformer
1) When the transformer is put into operation, the high-voltage side switch shall be closed first,
then the low-voltage side switch shall be closed. The low-voltage side switch shall be opened first
and then high-voltage side switch when power is off. It is not allowed to impact the transformer
with the disconnector (isolation switch).
2) The transformer which is newly installed or overhauled to replace the coil shall be impacted
five times (newly installed) or three times (to replace the coil) under the full voltage before
operation.
13.1.2.2 Parallel and Disjoint Operation of Generator
1) Under normal circumstances, the generator shall be parallel by direct control and automatic
quasi-synchronous method.
The main conditions of the quasi-synchronization methods are:
1) The phase’s positions are the same;
2) The frequency is the same. The frequency difference of the automatic quasi-synchronous
device is set as 0.3HZ, so the maximum allowable frequency difference is 0.3HZ when the
automatic quasi-synchronous device is adopted. When the manual quasi-synchronous device is
adopted, the general frequency difference shall be controlled within 0.1HZ for parallel;
3) The voltage shall be the same, and the voltage difference shall be within 5% of the rated
voltage generally;
163
4) If the phase sequence is the same, the nuclear phase test shall be carried out for the newly
input or after overhaul.
2) Before the generator is disengaged, it is necessary to reduce the generator's active and
reactive load to zero completely before pulling the circuit breaker. When the system stops normally,
the active power shall be checked to zero after the shutdown. The generator and the system shall be
disbanded after the watt-hour meter stops or reverses, or the reverse power protection action shall
be adopted. No load parallel-off is allowed.
3) During the parallel operation of the generator, if abnormal conditions are found and the
circuit is checked, the circuit must be turned into a cold standby.
4) Before the grid connection of generator, it is not allowed to take out the operation fuse or
(disconnect the air small switch). If it is necessary to take out the operation fuse or (disconnect the
air small switch), the circuit shall be switched to cold standby before proceeding.
13.1.2.4 Operation of Circuit Breaker
1) Before the circuit breaker is powered on, the operating mechanism, control circuit (including
operation, signal, hydraulic mechanism and energy storage circuit) shall be checked, and whether
the relay protection and automatic device are in the input state.
2) When the circuit breaker is pulled or closed, the current indication and three-phase current
balance shall be checked, and the position indication and light signal shall be checked for accuracy.
3) When the switch of electromagnetic closing mechanism is used for power transmission, the
disconnector (isolation switch) shall be operated before putting on the closing fuse; In the case of
power failure, the switch shall be disconnected first, the closing fuse be removed, and then the
disconnector be (disconnecting switch) operated.
4) After the switch is closed, the switch and its mechanism shall be checked after the whole
operation is completed.
5) Under no circumstances, the high voltage switch for electric closing operation will allow the
live manual operating mechanism to close. The high voltage switch is not allowed to try
transmitting switch on on-site after short-circuit malfunction tripping.
13.1.2.5 Operation of the Disconnector (isolation switch)
1) It must be quick and decisive when closing the disconnector manually (disconnecting
switch), but not too hard. If an arc is found (including normal or abnormal arcs) when closing, the
disconnector (isolation switch) shall be closed quickly and not opened again. When the
disconnector is pulled (isolation switch) manually, it shall be slow and careful, especially when the
blade of the disconnector has just left the blade. If abnormal arc occurs, it shall be closed
immediately and stop the operation. When the electric arc is generated by pulling the disconnector
(isolation switch), the disconnector (isolation switch) shall be disconnected immediately. After the
operation of the disconnector (isolation switch), the opening and closing conditions of the
164
disconnector (isolation switch) shall be checked, and the operating mechanism and the disconnector
pin (isolation switch) shall be inserted or locked.
2) It is forbidden strictly to cut off the load current, line and no-load current of transformer
with the disconnector (isolation switch). The disconnector shall be closed prior to switch (isolation
switch), and switch can be opened after the switch is opened (isolation switch).
3) When there is no switch in the circuit, the following operation is allowed with the
disconnector (isolation switch):
a. The capacitive current of opening and closing the fault-free busbar and the equipment
connected directly to the busbar;
b. Open and close voltage mutual inductor when there is no fault;
c. When there is no lightning strike, open and close the arrester;
d. The current of opening and closing excitation shall be no more than 2 A of no-load
transformer, the current capacity shall be no more than 5 A, and the voltage shall be no more than
10KV of no-load line;
13.1.2.6 Impact Closing Operation
The transformer, busbar and other equipment shall carry out the full voltage impact according
to relevant regulations before the new installation is put into operation and after the overhaul is
completed. If possible, the charging shall be carried out by means of rising 0.
After the accident tripping of equipment, such as transformer, busbar, etc., trip, the full voltage
impact test can be carried out in accordance with the relevant provisions of this regulation. However,
if possible, the charging shall be carried out by means of rising 0.
The following problems shall be noted during the operation of impact closing:
1) The impact switching on shall have sufficient interruption capacity, and the number of
malfunction tripping shall be within the specified times;
2) The protection device of impact switching on shall be complete and put into operation;
When necessary, the constant value of protection device can be reduced before the impact switching
on;
3) The power supply which has little influence on stability shall be selected as the impact
closing power supply and the power flow of the contact line shall be checked and adjusted when
necessary;
4) When the transformer is impacted, the over-voltage induced by the open-circuit operation on
the low-voltage side shall be prevented.
13.1.2.7 The following problems shall be noted when raising pressure from 0 such as,
transformer, busbar and other equipment:
165
1) The protection of the rising 0 unit shall be put into operation. The equipment being boosted
shall be well protected.
2) For a directly neutral grounded system, the neutral point of the transformer applying voltage
must be grounded;
3) It shall be noted that the three-phase stator current of the generator shall be balanced, not
exceed a certain value, and the voltage of the booster busbar shall not exceed the rated voltage;
4) When the busbar and transformer are raised from 0, it shall be prevented from producing
resonant overvoltage or induced overvoltage.
5) There shall be a clear break point between the rising0 system and the operating system.
13.2 Basic Principles for Accident Treatment
13.2.1 Basic Principles for Accident Treatment
13.2.1.1 Once the accident occurs, it shall be able to eliminate the accident correctly, timely
and quickly and restore the system to normal operation.
13.2.1.2 Main tasks of accident treatment:
1) Try to ensure the proper operation of the motor and the main engine used in the plant to
avoid the escalation of accident;
2) Limit the development of the accident as soon as possible, eliminate the source of the
accident, and remove the danger to people and equipment;
3) Keep the equipment running in all possible ways to ensure normal power supply to the user;
4) To restore power transmission to the equipment which has been cut off as soon as possible;
5) Adjust the operation mode to return to normal.
13.2.1.3 When handling the accident, the shift supervisor is in command. The electrical chief
on duty shall lead the electrical operators to carry out the specific operation. When the shift
supervisor is not in the central control room, the principal shift shall be assigned to take command
of the shift supervisor. The shift supervisor shall return to the central control room as soon as
possible.
13.2.1.4 At the time of the accident, the electrical personnel on duty shall judge and deal with
it in the following order:
1) Determine the overall situation of the accident based on the changes, indications, relay
protection actions (signal and light indicator) and external indications of the equipment;
2) Identify the nature, location and scope of the accident through inspection and testing;
3) If there is a threat to the person or equipment, try to remove the threat immediately and, if
necessary, stop the operation of the equipment; If there is no threat to the person or equipment,
efforts shall be made to maintain and restore normal operation of the equipment;
166
4) All equipment that is not damaged shall be kept in normal operation; For the faulty
equipment, after identifying the fault part and accident nature, necessary treatment shall be carried
out; If the duty personnel cannot handle the damaged equipment, they shall notify the maintenance
personnel immediately for repair. Before the maintenance personnel arrive, the on-duty personnel
shall take preliminary safety measures at the work site (such as disconnecting power, installing
grounding wire, hanging label, etc.);
5) In order to prevent the expansion of the accident, it is necessary to report each step of the
accident handling proactively to the shift supervisor promptly and correctly.
13.2.1.5 If bus fails, boosting test or impact test can be conducted after checking the busbar
and disconnecting all switches on the busbar. If someone is working on the power distribution, the
operator shall be informed to leave before the voltage rise or impact.
13.2.1.6 The accident must be handled promptly and correctly, but not in a hurry or careless
way. Otherwise, accidents tend to spread. The duty officer must repeat the order to the sender when
he receives the order to deal with the accident. If the order is not clear or the intention is not clear,
he shall inquire clearly. Duty officer can only listen to the command of the shift supervisor (main
shift), then operation can be executed. The order shall be immediately reported to the originator
after execution. The sender shall be familiar with the person who receives the order and make the
receiver to repeat orders. If the next order dealing with an accident is to be determined on the basis
of the execution of the previous order, it shall be subject to direct reporting, but shall not be
communicated by a third party, and shall not be permitted to judge the execution of the order
according to the instructions of the watt-hour meter measuring and testing equipment. Watch the
watt-hour meter measuring and testing equipment and signal carefully when an accident occurs. It is
important for the operator on duty in the main control room to record the execution time (especially
the sequence) of each operation and the phenomena related to the accident.
13.2.1.7 In the event of an accident at the time of the shift, the shift operator shall remain at
his own post. The replacement personnel must cooperate to deal with the accident under the unified
command of the shift supervisor. After the normal operation is resumed after the accident treatment,
the shift supervisor or the leader of the Project Department will give a unified command to take
over. (except for the franchisor).
13.2.1.8 After the accident occurs, the shift supervisor shall report the accident to the leaders
of the Project Department and the persons in charge of each professional.
13.2.1.9 In the event of an accident, the shift supervisor shall be entitled to give orders to any
staff related to the handling of the accident, and each staff member shall arrive in time in
accordance with the order of the shift supervisor.
13.2.1.10 The general principles of accident treatment above shall be mastered based on the
nature of the accident and specific conditions in the accident treatment.
13.2.2 Contents of reporting to the dispatch during accident handling:
167
13.2.2.1 When an accident or abnormality occurs, the following report shall be made to the
dispatch immediately:
1) Abnormal conditions, abnormal equipment and related conditions;
2) Accidental tripping circuit breaker (name, No.) and tripping time;
3) Relay protection and automatic device operation;
4) Output, voltage, frequency and line power flow of the power plant;
5) Personal safety and equipment damage;
6) Related recording of fault recorder.
13.2.2.2 When the shift supervisor has an accident, he shall stay in the control room and get
in touch with the dispatch in time. If it is necessary to leave, he shall appoint the main duty agent
and inform the dispatch.
13.2.2.3 In accident handling, all operations involving the system must be approved by the
on-duty dispatcher.
13.2.2.4 When the system accident occurs, the on-duty personnel of the non-accident unit
shall not be anxious to inquire the cause of the accident and the occupy the dispatch phone, except
to report abnormal phenomena, strengthen the monitoring and expand the expectation of the
accident.
13.2.2.5 In order to prevent the expansion of the accident, the following situations can be
self-processing immediately and no dispatching command is required, but it shall be reported
promptly afterwards.
1) If there is a threat to the safety of the person or equipment, measures shall be taken
immediately according to the on-site procedures;
2) If the generator is tripping by mistake, joint shall be restored immediately.
3) To damaged equipment shall be isolated when there is no possibility of incoming call;
13.2.2.6 In the process of handling the accident, all scheduling orders and contact matters
shall be strictly executed by issuing, reciting and reporting. Unified scheduling terms shall be used,
and the accident situation shall be recorded in detail and various abnormal record books shall be
filled in.
13.2.2.7 When the dispatcher phone with the dispatcher fails, all possible methods (such as
long-distance dedicated telephone) shall be used to restore the contact with the dispatcher.
168
14 Fire Safety Regulations for Electrical Equipment

14.1 General Conditions
14.1.1 That non-electrical professional personnel to participate in fire extinguishing operations
shall be under the supervision of electrical personnel.
14.1.2 All electrical fire control equipment shall not be used without permission, which shall be
inspected and supplemented regularly by special departments.
14.1.3 It is strictly forbidden to work with fire within 5 meters around the accumulator room, oil
storage area, generator operation platform, etc.
14.1.4 The use of open flame devices in flammable areas (such as blowtorch, gas welding, electric
welding, etc.) must take fire safety measures before construction.
14.1.5 It is prohibited to store more than one kilogram of combustible materials on site. Gasoline,
kerosene and oil must be placed in sealed metal tanks and in specified places.
14.1.6 Oily cotton thrum and waste cloth used on site shall be cleaned, kept properly and not
thrown away.
14.1.7 If oil leakage equipment is found, it is necessary to deal with it immediately and strengthen
the inspection and monitoring of oil temperature of oil connection part of oil pipe and motor bearing.
14.1.8 In order to ensure the convenience of the fire extinguishing and the migration material, all
channels and access to the site of the fire fighting equipment installation access shall be forbidden
to block but shall be kept clear.
14.2 In case of fire of electrical equipment or nearby equipment:
14.2.1 Duty personnel shall disconnect the power supply of the equipment on fire immediately. If
the fire affects other equipment, cut off the power;
14.2.2 Put out fire immediately and inform professional fire fighters if the fire is serious;
14.2.3 If the fire cannot be cut off immediately for some reason, the flame spreads rapidly, and
endangers the adjacent equipment, the fire can be put out with a non-conductive dry extinguisher,
with rubber gloves and rubber shoes, and keep the safe distance between the live equipment and
people before the power is cut off (no live equipment with 10KV or high is allowed to fight fire);
14.2.4 In case of indoor fire, in order to reduce air convection to fuel fire expansion, all doors and
windows (except the necessary entrances and entrances for fire extinguishing) shall be closed. If the
fire operation needs windows to extract smoke, the fire leader's command shall be conducted;
14.2.5 The on-site personnel shall try their best to extinguish the fire and to prevent the expansion
of the fire before the arrival of firefighters. Those who have nothing to do with the fire shall exit the
scene to facilitate the smooth fire extinguishing work.
14.2.6 The duty supervisor shall contact the fire chief immediately to report the status of electrical
equipment and fire fighting before the firefighters arrive.
169
14.2.7 In the entire fire fighting process, the professional fire fighting personnel and the electrical
duty personnel must cooperate closely, exchange intelligence to facilitate the fire fighting operation
to proceed quickly;
14.2.8 Professional fire fighting personnel must get the notice of "the equipment has been cut off"
from the shift supervisor or the duty monitor before carrying out the fire fighting operation of
electrical equipment;
14.2.9 Fire fighters are prohibited absolutely from performing any power outage, blackout or other
operations on electrical equipment. In order to extinguish fire, fire personnel must enter the high
voltage power distribution equipment or other electrical equipment room, and must be accompanied
by the personnel on duty;
14.2.10 When using carbon dioxide or carbon tetrachloride to extinguish a fire, the
extinguisher shall stand in the upwind, to prevent from poisoning and suffocation.
14.3 Fire Fighting Method for Electrical Equipment
14.3.1 Generator and motor
14.3.1.1 Ignition of generator:
1) Disjoint the generator and the system;
2) External fire shall be extinguished by using carbon dioxide;
3) The fire inside the body shall be filled with carbon dioxide immediately to extinguish fire;
4) Sand is prohibited strictly in the generator for fire extinguishing.
14.3.1.2 Excitation equipment ignition:
1) Disjoint the generator and grid, and use carbon dioxide or carbon tetrachloride for fire
extinguishing;
2) Sand or foam extinguishing agent is strictly prohibited.
14.3.1.3 Motor ignition:
1) Disconnect motor power immediately and use carbon dioxide or carbon tetrachloride as fire
extinguishers;
2) Sand, water or foam extinguishing agent is strictly prohibited.
14.3.2 Power Transformer
14.3.2.1 External ignition of power transformer:
1) Disconnect each side power supply of the transformer;
2) To isolate the fire area from other equipment that may be spread, and to set up security
watchmen in the passageways;
3) Use carbon dioxide and carbon tetrachloride to extinguish the fire. If impossible, use
sprinkler water to extinguish the fire. If necessary, use sand to extinguish the fire.
170
14.3.2.2 Internal ignition of transformer:

1) Disconnect each side power supply of the transformer;
2) Use carbon dioxide or carbon tetrachloride as fire extinguishers;
3) Open the accident drain valve of transformer quickly to drain oil.
14.3.2.3 When the oil leaking from the upper cover of the transformer catches fire, disconnect
the power supply at each side of the transformer and open the accident drain valve to drain oil
quickly, so that the oil level in the transformer is lower than the damaged part of the enclosure, and
stop the strong ventilation. When the transformer is likely to explode, all oil in the transformer must
be released.
14.3.2.4 The iron core of transformer combustion:
Phenomenon: Local heating of iron core, carbonization of oil, oil ejection, black combustible gas
released by gas relay, etc.;
In this case, the transformer shall be out of service immediately for maintenance.
14.3.3 Wiring ignition:
The power shall be cut off. If the grounding voltage of the wiring is below 250V, the wiring
can be cut off or the safety device be taken off by insulated-handle scissors or pliers, and disconnect
the failure line. But you shall put on rubber shoes, rubber gloves and eyeglasses. If the grounding
voltage of the wiring is above 250V, the power supply on both sides must be disconnect with a
switch, and the fire shall be put out with carbon dioxide, carbon tetrachloride or water.
14.3.4 Voltage and Current Mutual Inductor
When the oil-immersed or rubber-filled mutual inductor occurs accident, the oil or rubber will
be burned. The damaged mutual inductor and the power circuit shall be disconnected immediately.
Sand or carbon dioxide and carbon tetrachloride shall be used to extinguish the fire.
14.3.5 When power cables and cable trenches catch fire, the following measures shall be taken:
14.3.5.1 Disconnect all power supply of ignition cable;
14.3.5.2 In case of cable fire, put on oxygen gas mask, rubber gloves, and insulating shoes;
14.3.5.3 Extinguishing fire with fire-extinguishing bullet, sand and earth;
14.3.5.4 In case of fire, it is prohibited to contact the cable steel armor or move the cable
directly or using ungrounded metal.
14.3.5.5 When the cable in the cable trench is burning and there is a distinct possibility of
burning the cable laid side by side, these cables shall be cut off.
14.3.6 If the accumulator room is on fire, the following measures shall be taken:
14.3.6.1 Disconnect the disconnector of the battery outlet;
171
14.3.6.2 Use water or carbon dioxide and carbon tetrachloride to extinguish fire, and pay
attention to the containers of sulfuric acid stored in the room, so as not to burn the body out of
sulfuric acid. When there is a fire in the electrical equipment of the accumulator fan device,
disconnect the power supply of the fan immediately, and stop the air supply to the accumulator
room from the ventilator;
14.3.7 Wiring
When the wiring is on fire, the power shall be disconnected. If the grounding voltage of the
wiring is below 250V, the wiring can be cut off or the safety device be taken off by insulated-
handle scissors or pliers, and cut off the failure line. But you shall put on rubber shoes, rubber
gloves and eyeglasses. If the grounding voltage of the wiring is above 250V, the power supply on
both sides must be disconnect with a switch, and the fire shall be put out with carbon dioxide,
carbon tetrachloride or water.
172
173
Appendix 1 Letter and Model Meaning

Model meaning of turbine generator and exciter
T (located in the first letter)-synchronous
T (located in the second letter)-adjusting phase
Q (located in the first or second letter)-steamer
F Generator
Q (located in the third letter)-hydrogen outer cooled
N - hydrogen inner cooled
S or SS-Double-water inner cooled
K - quick installation
G - improvement
TH - humid tropics
Model meaning of AC/DC motor
Name Model Meaning of letters

DC Motor Z2 Z - DC motor
ZO2 O - sealed type
Squirrel J2, JO2, BJO2, J - asynchronous motor
asynchronous motor JO2-W, JO2-L, O - sealed type
J3, JO3, JO4, W - outdoor
JS, JSQ B - explosion-proof
L - aluminum wire
S - double squirrel cage
Q - strengthen insulation
Windings rotor JR J - asynchronous motor
asynchronous motor JRQ R - winding type rotor
JR3 Q - strengthen insulation
Definite-purpose JQS J - asynchronous motor
motor JZ2 QS - submarine
JZR2 Z - used for lifting or electromagnetism
JZT R一Winding type
T - adjusting speed
174
The model meaning of power transformer

S - three-phase
D - single-phase
J——Oil-immersed self-cooling
F - oil-dipped air cool
FP - forcing oil circulating air cool
SP - forcing oil circulating water cool
S - three volumes (double volumes not indicated)
Q - total insulation
JN-Neutral grounding system reduces insulation (center point grounding half-insulation is not
allowed)
Z - load adjusting pressure (no-load adjusting pressure not indicated)
L - aluminum coil
O - self-coupling (it is the lowering pressure self-coupling when it is in the first place of model
and the boosting self-coupling when it is in the last place of model)
TH - humid tropics
TA - note after arid tropics type indicates the number of modifying models
Model meaning of voltage mutual inductor
J一一Voltage mutual inductor (the first letter)
Y——Voltage mutual inductor
D - single-phase
S - three-phase
G - dry
J - oil-dipped (the third letter)
C - cascade (the second letter)
C - ceramic type insulation (the third letter)
Z - epoxy resin cast insulation
R - capacitive
W - five pillars and three volumes
B - with compensating coil
J - grounding protection (the fourth letter)
175
After the hyphen:

GY - used in plateau (high altitude)
TH - used in humid tropics
Numbers indicates the rated voltage (KV)
Model meaning of current mutual inductor
J——Current mutual inductor (the first letter)
Q - coil (the second letter)
Y - low voltage
M——Busbar mode
D - single turn (the second letter)
F - complex turn
R - embedded
C - ceramic type insulation (the third letter)
X - zero-phase sequence
J - grounding protection (the second letter)
J - oil-dipped (the first letter)
A - through-wall (the second letter)
B - supportive (the second letter)
G - improvement;
Z - resin cast insulation;
K - plastic enclosure insulation;
S - plastic-injection (LMS - 0.5) rapid-saturated (LQS - 1);
J - increase the capacity (the third and fourth letter indicate the resin cast insulation for LQJ -
10 and LMJ - 10);
W - outdoor
D - Differential protection (The last letter of the model and some plants also mark with B and
C);
Q - strengthen (the fourth letter)
L - cable (the third letter, which indicates LCLWD);
L - aluminum wire (the last letter of model);
After the hyphen:
176
Numbers indicates the rated voltage (KV);

GY - used in plateau (high altitude);
TH - used in humid tropics;
SW2 - model of oil circuit breakage used;
A-Subseries;
B - used for transformer;
Type definition of high voltage circuit breaker and disconnecting switch
L——SF6 circuit breaker
S - low-oil circuit breaker
D——Oily circuit breaker
K——Air circuit breaker
C - magnetic blow-out circuit breaker
G - isolated switch (located in the first place)
N - indoor
W - outdoor
C - handcart (after the model)
G - improvement
The circuit breaker for special conditions shall be given the following code name after the fifth
place:
W - pollution area
G - high-altitude area
TH - humid tropics
TA - dry tropics
H - high and cold area
Type definition of operating mechanism for high voltage circuit breaker and disconnecting switch
C - operating mechanism
S - manual operation
J - motor operation
D - electromagnetic type
T - spring-type
Y - hydraulic type
177
X - box (installed in the box for outdoor use)

G - improvement
Mode meaning of high voltage fuse
R - fuse
N - indoor
W - outdoor
H - resistor with limited current
Z——With the reclosing
T——With thermal trip
Model meaning of arrester
F - valve-regulated arrester
Z - used in generator and power transformer
D - use for Rotary Motor
S - used for power distribution (transformer)
C - magnetic blow-out
J-Neutral grounding directly
Model meaning of conductor
TMY——Hard copper busbar
LMY——Duralumin busbar
TMR——Soft copper busbar
LMR——Soft aluminum busbar
LJ - flexible stranded wire
LGJ - steel core aluminum stranded wire
LGJQ - light steel core aluminum stranded wire
GJ - steel stranded wire
HLJ - aluminum-alloy conductor
TJ - hard copper stranded wire
TRJ - soft copper stranded wire
Model meaning of cable
1. Cable models are arranged in the following order
178
insulation type - wire core materials - inner sheath - other structure characteristics - outer sheath
2. Meaning of Letters and Numbers
Types (according to Conductor Inner sheath Characteristics Outer Sheath

insulation materials)
V - polyvinyl chloride L - aluminum H - cabtyre sheath CY - oil-filled 0 - responding naked sheath
plastics core HF - non-ignitibility 1 - class anticorrosion and fiber outer
cabtyre sheath sheath
X - vulcanizate Copper core D - not- 2 - Second-class anticorrosion, steel strip
XD - butyllithium not indicated L - wrapped with dripping armored; Copper strip reinforcement (oil-
vulcanizate aluminum filled cable)
Q - wrapped with F - phase 3 - single thin steel wire armored

lead separated
Y - polyethylene V - polyvinyl G—high 4 - double thin steel wire armored
chloride sheath voltage
YJ - cross-linking p - lean oil 5 - single-thick steel wire armored
polyethylene
Y - polyethylene Dry insulation 6 - double thick steel wire armored
sheath
Z - paper P - shield 29—double thick steel wire armored
wrapped with polyethylene sheath
Z - DC
39 -thin steel wire armored
59 -thick steel wire armored
3. Add K before the cable model is control cable; Add P before the cable to model is signal
cable; The cable without K or P are power cables
179
Appendix 2: Indonesia Electrical Professional Equipment in both Chinese and English
NO. Name English abbreviation

1.0 The incoming wire system of generator
1.1 Turbine generator
1.2. Enclosure-continuous isolated-phase enclosed busbar
1.2.1 Main circuit of generator enclosed busbar
1.2.2 Branch used in the factory enclosed busbar
1.2.3 Branch of voltage transformer mutual inductor enclosed busbar
1.2.4 Neutral busbar segment
1.2.5 Neutral grounding transformer cabinet
1.2.6 The voltage mutual inductor cabinet of the generator outlet
1.2.7 Arrester cabinet of generator outlet
1.2.8 Current mutual inductor
1.2.9 Slight pressure device
1.3 6KV non-segregated busbar
1.3.1 6KV non-segregated busbar in active section
1.3.2 6KV non-segregated busbar in common section
1.4 AC/DC exciting non-segregated busbar
1.4.1 AC exciting non-segregated busbar
1.4.2 DC exciting non-segregated busbar
1.5 Rectifier cabinet
1.6 Switching cabinet
1.7 Field suppression screen
180

2 A outer device of steam turbine room
2.1 Main transformer
2.2 High voltage start-up/backup transformer
2.3 High voltage station transformer
2.5 Zinc oxide arrester
2.7 Single-pole isolated switch
2.8 Grounding disconnector
2.9 6KV neutral grounding transformer cabinet
2.10 SYG
2.11 T-shaped clamp
2.12 Voltage mutual inductor
2.13 Disconnector
3 The power house system
3.1 Low voltage station transformer
3.2 Diesel Engine Driven Generator
3.3 High voltage switch cabinet
3.4 Low voltage draw-out switch cabinet
3.5 Power distribution box
3.6 Iron clad switch
3.7 Knife-blade switch box
3.8 Socket box
3.9 Transformer joint box
3.10 Single-phase three-pole socket
181

3.11 Three-phase socket
3.12 Busbar fitting
3.13 support insulator
3.14 Copper busbar
3.15 Steel busbar
3.16 Cable lug
3.17 Shaped steel
4 The second wiring part
4.1 DC system and UPS
4.1.1 220V accumulator used for power
4.1.2 220V accumulator used for control
4.1.3 220V charging device
4.1.4 220V DC incoming screen
4.1.5 220V DC feeder screen
4.1.6 UPS device
4.1.17 UPS distribution panel
4.1.18 DC split screen
4.2 Control and protection
4.2.1 Protection cabinet of generator-transformer unit
4.2.2 Start-up/backup transformer protection cabinet
4.2.3 Diesel engine protection device
4.2.4 Watt-hour meter panel
182

4.2.5 The transmitter panel
4.2.6 Interface screen
4.2.7 Auxiliary and relay screen
4.2.8 Unit fault recorder screen
4.2.9 Fast switching screen
4.2.10 Experimental power supply panel
4.2.11 Automatic quasi-synchronizing device
4.2.12 Computer monitoring system of 150kV booster station SCCS
4.2.13 Coal-conveying programmed control system
4.2.14 Coal-conveying industrial television system
4.2.15 DC screen of coal handling system
4.2.16 Terminal box
4.2.17 Terminal Box
5 Cable
5.1 Power cable
5.1.1 Flame-proof cross-linking polyethylene insulated steel strip
armored
5.1.2 Power cable with polyethylene sheath
5.1.3 Flame-proof cross-linking polyethylene insulated steel strip
armored
5.2 Control cable
5.3 Cable bridge
5.4 Combined cable supports
183

5.5 Cable fire-proof material
5.6 Cable thermal shrinkage terminal
5.7 Cable intermediate joint
5.8 Cable flexible pipe joint
6 Slide wire in the whole factory
6.1 Energy-saving slide wire
7 Plant-Wide Grounding
7.1 Steel rod wrapped with copper
7.2 Copper conductor
8 Lighting and small power in the whole factory
8.1 Lighting Distribution Box
8.2 Accident lighting automatic input box
8.3 Photoelectric control lighting box
8.4 Button box
8.5 Low voltage socket box
8.6 Transformer box
8.7 Socket box for power supply
8.8 Maintenance socket
8.9 Switch box
8.10 Sealed water-proof and dust-proof luminaire
8.11 Block plate luminaire
184

8.12 Mix-lighting luminaire
8.13 Louver all ceiling
8.14 Embedded fluorescent luminaire
8.15 Stainless steel grating luminaire
8.16 Aluminum alloy body luminaire
8.17 Explosion-proof fluorescent luminaire
8.18 Sealed damp-proof luminaire
8.19 Gate indication luminaire
8.20 Floodlight
8.21 Steel-rod illumination
8.22 Ceiling luminaire
8.23 Wall lamp
8.24 Air obstruction luminaire
8.25 Embedded barrel luminaire
8.26 Fluorescent tube
8.27 Dark switch
8.28 Dark socket
8.29 sealed socket
8.30 Explosion-proof switch
8.31 Galvanized steel pipe
8.32 Trunking
185

8.33 Circlip-type joint
8.34 Metal flexible pipe
8.35 Sealed joint box
8.36 Explosion-proof joint box
8.37 Round steel
186

Electric 135 MW - Man Book

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Electric 135 MW - Man Book

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electric 135 MW - Man Book

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PLTU Jeneponto UNIT 2*135MW

Electrical operation procedures

Released on July 13, 2018 Implemented since July 13, 2018

Released by Indonesia Jeneponto Phase II Operation and Maintenance Project Department

Indonesia Jeneponto Phase II Operation and Maintenance Project Department

6.2 Technical Specification for Equipment................................................................................ 61

9.5 DC System Protection ................................................................................................. 109

1. Overview of Main Equipment

1.5 Overview of the UPS system:

2. 150KV GIS Device

2.2.5.6 TransferStrip1: three-phase discordance protection 1 outlet pressure plate; TransferStrip2:

1.Central control cabinet 2. Busbar side three-position disconnecting/earthing switch 3. Circuit

Appearance of circuit breaker

Internal structure of circuit breaker

Structure of arc extinguish chamber

Alarm pressure MPa 0.58

2) The technical parameters of PT in 150KV GIS room

TYPE:JDQXFH-150 (model) Standardcode:IEC61869 (standard code)

Rated voltage ratio：

Totalweight:350kg (total weight) Dateofmanufacture:2016-8 (date of manufacture)

3) The technical parameters: of CT in 150KV GIS room

4) The technical parameters of arrester in 150KV GIS room:

SF6GAS-INSULATEDMETALENCLOSEDSURGEARRESTER (SF6 gas insulated metal enclosed surge arrester)

5) The technical parameters of quick earthing switch in 150KV GIS room:

High-speed earthing switch

2.2.9 Regulations for operation of 150kV circuit breaker:

2.2.13 Inspection items of 150KV circuit breaker

Structure of Three-position Disconnecting/Earthing Switch

Opening state of earthing switch

Closing state of earthing switch

2.4 Operation regulations for 150KV disconnector

2.6.5 There is no foreign body near the disconnector.

3. Operation Procedures for Generators

3.2 Introduction to Generator Structure

The generator is an air-cooled, self-ventilated two-pole cylindrical-rotor motor with a closed

The maximum temperature of inlet air is not allowed to exceed 55℃.

Components Insulation grade Maximum temperature Maximum

Components Monitoring temperature Monitoring temperature ℃

3.3 Starting and Paralleling

10) Switch to constant speed after the turbine reaches 3000.

3.5.1.21 Disconnect the control power switch of 5A4 circuit breaker.

3.7 Abnormal Operation of Generator and Troubleshooting

4) The generator frequency meter indicates abnormally.

3) If the generator is in the under-excitation state (leading-phase operation), the "low-

3.7.14.1 The generator smokes and catches fire.

4. Operation Procedures for Excitation System

Fig. 2-1 Self-shunt Excitation System

Fig. 2-1 Self-shunt Excitation System

Host Board 1 pc.

Panel (or back of panel) Input switching variables

4.6 Inspection and Maintenance of Excitation System

5. Operation Procedures for Auxiliary Power System

5.2 State Division of Auxiliary Power Distribution Equipment

1) Check the protection action

6. Operation Procedures for Transformer

#3A/B high-voltage #2 startup/standby

6.2.2 Specification for #3A/3B unit low-voltage transformer equipment:

TBEA Tianjin TBEA Tianjin TBEA Tianjin TBEA Tianjin